US20150118291A1 - Amphoteric Liposome Formulation - Google Patents

Amphoteric Liposome Formulation Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20150118291A1
US20150118291A1 US14/568,736 US201414568736A US2015118291A1 US 20150118291 A1 US20150118291 A1 US 20150118291A1 US 201414568736 A US201414568736 A US 201414568736A US 2015118291 A1 US2015118291 A1 US 2015118291A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
mixture
popc
lipid
dnai
mole
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Abandoned
Application number
US14/568,736
Inventor
Neal Clifford Goodwin
Gerold Endert
Natalie Herzog
Yvonne Kerwitz
Steffen Panzner
Wendi Rodrigueza
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
NOVOSOM VERWALTUNGS GmbH
Sierra Oncology Inc
Original Assignee
NOVOSOM VERWALTUNGS GmbH
ProNAi Therapeutics Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by NOVOSOM VERWALTUNGS GmbH, ProNAi Therapeutics Inc filed Critical NOVOSOM VERWALTUNGS GmbH
Priority to US14/568,736 priority Critical patent/US20150118291A1/en
Assigned to PRONAI THERAPEUTICS, INC. reassignment PRONAI THERAPEUTICS, INC. ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: RODRIGUEZA, WENDI, GOODWIN, NEAL CLIFFORD
Assigned to NOVOSOM AG reassignment NOVOSOM AG ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: KERWITZ, YVONNE, HERZOG, NATALIE, ENDERT, GEROLD
Assigned to NOVOSOM AG reassignment NOVOSOM AG CORRECTIVE ASSIGNMENT TO CORRECT ADD 4TH INVENTOR PREVIOUSLY RECORDED AT REEL: 035186 FRAME: 0523. ASSIGNOR(S) HEREBY CONFIRMS THE ASSIGNMENT. Assignors: KERWITZ, YVONNE, HERZOG, NATALIE, PANZNER, STEFFEN, ENDERT, GEROLD
Publication of US20150118291A1 publication Critical patent/US20150118291A1/en
Assigned to NOVOSOM VERWALTUNGS GMBH reassignment NOVOSOM VERWALTUNGS GMBH CHANGE OF NAME (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: NOVOSOM AG
Abandoned legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12NMICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N15/00Mutation or genetic engineering; DNA or RNA concerning genetic engineering, vectors, e.g. plasmids, or their isolation, preparation or purification; Use of hosts therefor
    • C12N15/09Recombinant DNA-technology
    • C12N15/11DNA or RNA fragments; Modified forms thereof; Non-coding nucleic acids having a biological activity
    • C12N15/113Non-coding nucleic acids modulating the expression of genes, e.g. antisense oligonucleotides; Antisense DNA or RNA; Triplex- forming oligonucleotides; Catalytic nucleic acids, e.g. ribozymes; Nucleic acids used in co-suppression or gene silencing
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/70Carbohydrates; Sugars; Derivatives thereof
    • A61K31/7088Compounds having three or more nucleosides or nucleotides
    • A61K31/711Natural deoxyribonucleic acids, i.e. containing only 2'-deoxyriboses attached to adenine, guanine, cytosine or thymine and having 3'-5' phosphodiester links
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K9/00Medicinal preparations characterised by special physical form
    • A61K9/10Dispersions; Emulsions
    • A61K9/127Liposomes
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K9/00Medicinal preparations characterised by special physical form
    • A61K9/10Dispersions; Emulsions
    • A61K9/127Liposomes
    • A61K9/1271Non-conventional liposomes, e.g. PEGylated liposomes, liposomes coated with polymers
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K9/00Medicinal preparations characterised by special physical form
    • A61K9/10Dispersions; Emulsions
    • A61K9/127Liposomes
    • A61K9/1271Non-conventional liposomes, e.g. PEGylated liposomes, liposomes coated with polymers
    • A61K9/1272Non-conventional liposomes, e.g. PEGylated liposomes, liposomes coated with polymers with substantial amounts of non-phosphatidyl, i.e. non-acylglycerophosphate, surfactants as bilayer-forming substances, e.g. cationic lipids
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P35/00Antineoplastic agents
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12NMICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N15/00Mutation or genetic engineering; DNA or RNA concerning genetic engineering, vectors, e.g. plasmids, or their isolation, preparation or purification; Use of hosts therefor
    • C12N15/09Recombinant DNA-technology
    • C12N15/11DNA or RNA fragments; Modified forms thereof; Non-coding nucleic acids having a biological activity
    • C12N15/111General methods applicable to biologically active non-coding nucleic acids
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12NMICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N15/00Mutation or genetic engineering; DNA or RNA concerning genetic engineering, vectors, e.g. plasmids, or their isolation, preparation or purification; Use of hosts therefor
    • C12N15/09Recombinant DNA-technology
    • C12N15/11DNA or RNA fragments; Modified forms thereof; Non-coding nucleic acids having a biological activity
    • C12N15/113Non-coding nucleic acids modulating the expression of genes, e.g. antisense oligonucleotides; Antisense DNA or RNA; Triplex- forming oligonucleotides; Catalytic nucleic acids, e.g. ribozymes; Nucleic acids used in co-suppression or gene silencing
    • C12N15/1135Non-coding nucleic acids modulating the expression of genes, e.g. antisense oligonucleotides; Antisense DNA or RNA; Triplex- forming oligonucleotides; Catalytic nucleic acids, e.g. ribozymes; Nucleic acids used in co-suppression or gene silencing against oncogenes or tumor suppressor genes
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12NMICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N2310/00Structure or type of the nucleic acid
    • C12N2310/10Type of nucleic acid
    • C12N2310/14Type of nucleic acid interfering N.A.
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12NMICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N2320/00Applications; Uses
    • C12N2320/30Special therapeutic applications
    • C12N2320/32Special delivery means, e.g. tissue-specific

Definitions

  • the invention relates to compositions and methods of using the same to treat cancer.
  • the invention relates to DNAi oligonucleotides sequestered with amphoteric liposomes for the treatment of cancer.
  • Oncogenes have become the central concept in understanding cancer biology and may provide valuable targets for therapeutic drugs.
  • the oncogenes are overexpressed, and may be associated with tumorigenicity (Tsujimoto et al., Science 228:1440-1443 (1985)).
  • tumorigenicity Tujimoto et al., Science 228:1440-1443 (1985)
  • high levels of expression of the human bcl-2 gene have been found in all lymphomas with a t(14; 18) chromosomal translocations including most follicular B cell lymphomas and many large cell non-Hodgkin's lymphomas.
  • oncogenes include TGF- ⁇ , c-ki-ras, ras, Her-2, and c-myc.
  • oncogenes may be inhibited by single stranded DNAi oligonucleotides.
  • Nucleic acid therapeutics however, often lack therapeutic efficacy due to instability in body fluids or inefficient uptake into cells.
  • the invention provides compositions and methods for preparing and using amphoteric liposomes for the delivery of DNAi oligonucleotides for the treatment of cancer.
  • amphoteric liposomes may, for example, have an anionic or neutral charge at physiological pH and a cationic charge at an acidic pH of about 4.
  • compositions of the present invention sequester high amounts of DNAi oligonucleotides, between about 1 to 4 mg/ml (e.g., about 2 mg/ml) at a lipid concentration of about 10 to 100 mM or less; exhibit colloidal and serum stability; enhanced uptake into cells and tumors due to average liposome sizes of less than 200 ⁇ m; and low toxicity relative to liposomes formed with cationic lipids that are used in conventional transfection reagents.
  • the invention provides a mixture comprising amphoteric liposomes and a DNAi oligonucleotide.
  • the amphoteric liposomes have an isoelectric point of between 4 and 8.
  • the amphoteric liposomes are negatively charged or neutral at pH 7.4 and positively charged at pH 4.
  • the amphoteric liposomes include amphoteric lipids.
  • the amphoteric lipids can be HistChol, HistDG, isoHistSucc DG, Acylcarnosine, HCChol or combinations thereof.
  • the amphoteric liposomes include a mixture of one or more cationic lipids and one or more anionic lipids.
  • the cationic lipids can be DMTAP, DPTAP, DOTAP, DC-Chol, MoChol or HisChol, or combinations thereof
  • the anionic lipids can be CHEMS, DGSucc, Cet-P, DMGSucc, DOGSucc, POGSucc, DPGSucc, DG Succ, DMPS, DPPS, DOPS, POPS, DMPG, DPPG, DOPG, POPG, DMPA, DPPA, DOPA, POPA or combinations thereof.
  • the liposomes also include neutral lipids.
  • the neutral lipids include sterols and derivatives thereof.
  • the sterols comprise cholesterol and derivatives thereof.
  • the neutral lipids may also include neutral phospholipids.
  • the phospholipids include phosphatidylcholines or phosphatidylcholines and phosphoethanolamines.
  • the phosphatidylcholines are POPC, OPPC, natural or hydrogenated soy bean PC, natural or hydrogenated egg PC, DMPC, DPPC or DOPC and derivatives thereof and the phosphatidylethanolamines are DOPE, DMPE, DPPE or derivatives and combinations thereof.
  • the phosphatidylcholine is POPC, OPPC, soy bean PC or egg PC and the phosphatidylethanolamines is DOPE.
  • the lipids of the amphoteric liposomes include DOPE, POPC, CHEMS and MoChol; POPC, Chol, CHEMS and DOTAP; POPC, Chol, Cet-P and MoChol, or POPC, DOPE, MoChol and DMGSucc.
  • the amphoteric liposomes of the mixture of the invention can be formed from a lipid phase comprising a mixture of lipid components with amphoteric properties, wherein the total amount of charged lipids in the liposome can vary from 5 mole % to 70 mole %, the total amount of neutral lipids may vary from 20 mole % to 70 mole %, and a DNAi oligonucleotide.
  • the amphoteric liposomes include 3 to 20 mole % of POPC, 10 to 60 mole % of DOPE, 10 to 60 mole % of MoChol and 10 to 50 mole % of CHEMS.
  • the liposomes include POPC, DOPE, MoChol and CHEMS in the molar ratios of POPC/DOPE/MoChol/CHEMS of about 6/24/47/23 or 15/45/20/20.
  • the liposomes include 3 to 20 mole % of POPC, 10 to 40 mole % of DOPE, 15 to 60 mole % of MoChol and 15 to 60 mole % of DMGSucc.
  • the liposomes include POPC, DOPE, DMGSucc and MoChol in the molar ratios of POPC/DOPE/DMGSucc/MoChol of about 6/24/47/23 or 6/24/23/47.
  • the liposomes include 10 to 50 mole % of POPC, 20 to 60 mole % of Chol, 10 to 40 mole % of CHEMS and 5 to 20 mole % of DOTAP.
  • the liposomes include POPC, Chol, CHEMS and DOTAP in the molar ratio of POPC/Chol/CHEMS/DOTAP of about 30/40/20/10.
  • the liposomes include 10 to 40 mole % of POPC, 20 to 50 mole % of Chol, 5 to 30 mole % of Cet-P and 10 to 40 mole % of MoChol.
  • the molar ratio of POPC/Chol/Cet-P/MoChol is about 35/35/10/20.
  • the DNAi oligonucleotide contained in the amphoteric liposomal mixture comprises a DNAi oligonucleotide that hybridizes to SEQ ID NO:1249 or portions thereof.
  • the DNAi oligonucleotide can be SEQ ID NO:1250, 1251, 1252, 1253, 1267-1447 or the complement thereof.
  • the DNAi oligonucleotide can be SEQ ID NO:1250 or 1251 or the complement thereof.
  • the amphoteric liposomal mixture of this invention may further include an additional DNAi oligonucleotide, e.g., comprising one of SEQ ID NOs: 1250-1253 and 1270-1477, or selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NOs: 2-281, 283-461, 463-935, 937-1080, 1082-1248 and the complements thereof.
  • an additional DNAi oligonucleotide e.g., comprising one of SEQ ID NOs: 1250-1253 and 1270-1477, or selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NOs: 2-281, 283-461, 463-935, 937-1080, 1082-1248 and the complements thereof.
  • the DNAi oligonucleotides contained in the liposomal mixture are between 15 and 35 base pairs in length.
  • the amphoteric liposome-DNAi oligonucleotide mixture includes the DNAi oligonucleotides SEQ ID NO:1250 or 1251 and amphoteric liposomes comprising POPC, DOPE, MoChol and CHEMS in the molar ratio of POPC/DOPE/MoChol/CHEMS of about 6/24/47/23.
  • the amphoteric liposome-DNAi oligonucleotide mixture includes the DNAi oligonucleotide, PNT-100 (SEQ ID NO:1251), and amphoteric liposomes comprising POPC, DOPE, MoChol and CHEMS in the molar ratio of POPC/DOPE/MoChol/CHEMS of about 15/45/20/20.
  • the amphoteric liposomes of the mixture can include a size between 50 and 500 ⁇ m. In one embodiment, the size is between 80 and 300 ⁇ m and in another embodiment the size is between 90 and 200 ⁇ m.
  • the amphoteric liposomes may have an isoelectric point between 4 and 8.
  • the amphoteric liposomes may be negatively charged or neutral at pH 7.4 and positively charged at pH 4.
  • the amphoteric liposomes have a DNAi oligonucleotide concentration of at least about 2 mg/ml at a lipid concentration of 10 to 100 mM or less.
  • the invention provides a method of preparing amphoteric liposomes containing a DNAi oligonucleotide.
  • the method includes using an active loading procedure and in another, a passive loading procedure.
  • the method produces liposomes using manual extrusion, machine extrusion, homogenization, microfluidization or ethanol injection.
  • the method has an encapsulation efficiency of at least 35%.
  • the invention provides a method of introducing the DNAi oligonucleotide-amphoteric liposome mixture to cells or an animal.
  • the method includes administering the mixture to mammal to treat cancer.
  • the administered mixtures can reduce or stop tumor growth in mammals.
  • the introduction of the mixture results in a reduction of cell proliferation.
  • the mixture is administered to a cancer cell, a non-human animal or a human.
  • the mixture is introduced to an animal at a dosage of between 0.01 mg to 100 mg per kg of body weight.
  • the mixture is introduced to the animal one or more times per day or continuously.
  • the mixture is introduced to the animal via topical, pulmonary or parenteral administration or via a medical device.
  • the mixture administered to the animal or cells further includes a chemotherapy agent, and/or a cell targeting component.
  • FIG. 1 shows the effect of SEQ ID NO:1251 sequestered in amphoteric liposomes on the size of tumors from non-Hodgkin's Lymphoma WSU-DLCL2 xenografts in SCID mice.
  • FIG. 2 shows the effect of different lots of SEQ ID NO:1251 sequestered in amphoteric liposomes on the size of tumors from non-Hodgkin's Lymphoma WSU-DLCL2 xenografts in SCID mice.
  • FIG. 3 shows the tumor burden in mice carrying non-Hodgkin's Lymphoma WSU-DLCL2 xenografts treated with SEQ ID NO:1251 sequestered in amphoteric liposomes.
  • FIG. 4 shows a dose response evaluation of two formulations of SEQ ID NO:1251 sequestered in amphoteric liposomes on WSU-DLCL2 xenograft bearing mice.
  • FIG. 5 shows an enlarged view of a dose response evaluation of two formulations of SEQ ID NO:1251 sequestered in amphoteric liposomes on WSU-DLCL2 xenograft bearing mice.
  • FIG. 6 shows a dose response animal body weight evaluation in WSU-DLCL2 xenograft bearing mice treated with two formulations of SEQ ID NO:1251 sequestered in amphoteric liposomes.
  • FIG. 7 shows the effect of SEQ ID NO:1251 sequestered in amphoteric liposomes on the size of tumors from PC-3 xenografts in nude mice.
  • FIG. 8 shows the effect of SEQ ID NO:1251 sequestered in amphoteric liposomes on the growth rate of tumors from PC-3 xenografts in nude mice.
  • amphoter or “amphoteric” character refers to a structure, being a single substance (e.g., a compound) or a mixture of substances (e.g., a mixture of two or more compounds) or a supramolecular complex (e.g., a liposome) comprising charged groups of both anionic and cationic character wherein
  • Amphoter I Lipid Pairs refers to lipid pairs containing a stable cation and a chargeable anion. Examples include without limitation DDAB/CHEMS, DOTAP/CHEMS and DOTAP/DOPS. In some aspects, the ratio of the percent of cationic lipids to anionic lipids is lower than 1.
  • Amphoter II Lipid Pairs refers to lipid pairs containing a chargeable cation and a chargeable anion. Examples include without limitation Mo-Chol/CHEMS, DPIM/CHEMS or DPIM/DG-Succ. In some aspects, the ratio of the percent of cationic lipids to anionic lipids is between about 5 and 0.2.
  • Amphoter III Lipid Pairs refers to lipid pairs containing a chargeable cation and stable anion. Examples include without limitation Mo-Chol/DOPG or Mo-Chol/Chol-SO 4 . In one embodiment, the ratio of the percent of cationic lipids to anionic lipids is higher than 1.
  • liposome refers to one or more lipids forming a complex, usually surrounded by an aqueous solution. Liposomes are generally spherical structures comprising lipids fatty acids, lipid bilayer type structures, unilamellar vesicles and amorphous lipid vesicles. Generally, liposomes are completely closed lipid bilayer membranes containing an entrapped aqueous volume. The liposomes may be unilamellar vesicles (possessing a single bilayer membrane), oligolamellar or multilamellar (an onion-like structure characterized by multiple membrane bilayers, each separated from the next by an aqueous layer).
  • Liposomes of the present invention also include a DNAi oligonucleotide as defined below, either bound to the liposomes or sequestered in or on the liposomes.
  • the molecules include, without limitation, DNAi oligonucleotides and/or other agents used to treat diseases such as cancer.
  • an “amphoteric liposome” is a liposome with an amphoteric character, as defined above.
  • sequestered, sequestering, or sequester refers to encapsulation, incorporation, or association of a DNAi oligonucleotide, with the lipids of a liposome.
  • the DNAi oligonucleotide may be associated with the lipid bilayer or present in the aqueous interior of the liposome or both. It includes encapsulation in the aqueous core of the liposome.
  • DNAi oligonucleotide is located in the aqueous core of the liposome and part outside of the liposome in the aqueous phase of the liposomal suspension, where part of the DNAi oligonucleotide is located in the aqueous core of the liposome and part in the lipid portion of the liposome, or part sticking out of the liposomal exterior, where DNAi oligonucleotides are partially or totally embedded in the lipid portion of the liposome, and includes DNAi oligonucleotides associated with the liposomes, with all or part of the DNAi oligonucleotide associated with the exterior of the liposome.
  • a Passive Loading Procedure is a process wherein liposomes are charged with DNAi oligonucleotides and/or other molecules where the charges of the lipids are not useful for binding the oligonucleotides.
  • ALP Advanced Loading Procedure
  • non-human animals refers to all non-human animals including, without limitation, vertebrates such as rodents, non-human primates, ovines, bovines, ruminants, lagomorphs, porcines, caprines, equines, canines, felines, ayes, etc.
  • nucleic acid molecule refers to any nucleic acid containing molecule, including without limitation, DNA or RNA.
  • polynucleotide(s) generally refers to any polyribonucleotide or polydeoxyribonucleotide, which may be unmodified RNA or DNA or modified RNA or DNA.
  • polynucleotides as used herein refers to, among others, single- and double-stranded DNA, DNA that is a mixture of single- and double-stranded regions, single- and double-stranded RNA, and RNA that is mixture of single- and double-stranded regions, hybrid molecules comprising DNA and RNA that may be single-stranded or, more typically, double-stranded or a mixture of single- and double-stranded regions.
  • polynucleotide refers to triple-stranded regions comprising RNA or DNA or both RNA and DNA.
  • the strands in such regions may be from the same molecule or from different molecules.
  • the regions may include all of one or more of the molecules, but more typically involve only a region of some of the molecules.
  • One of the molecules of a triple-helical region often is an oligonucleotide.
  • polynucleotide includes DNAs or RNAs that contain one or more modified bases.
  • DNAs or RNAs with backbones modified for stability or for other reasons are “polynucloeotides,” “nucleic acid molecules” or “nucleic acid sequences” as those terms are intended herein.
  • the terms also encompass sequences that include any of the known base analogs of DNA and RNA.
  • polynucleotide as it is employed herein embraces such chemically, enzymatically or metabolically modified forms of polynucleotides, as well as the chemical forms of DNA and RNA characteristic of viruses and cells, including simple and complex cells, among others.
  • isolated nucleic acid sequence is meant a polynucleotide that is not immediately contiguous with either of the coding sequences with which it is immediately contiguous (one on the 5′ end and one on the 3′ end) in the naturally occurring genome of the organism from which it is derived.
  • the term therefore includes, for example, a recombinant DNA which is incorporated into a vector; into an autonomously replicating plasmid or virus; or into the genomic DNA of a prokaryote or eukaryote, or which exists as a separate molecule (e.g., a cDNA) independent of other sequences.
  • gene refers to a nucleic acid (e.g., DNA) sequence that includes coding sequences necessary for the production of a polypeptide, precursor or RNA (e.g., rRNA, tRNA).
  • the polypeptide can be encoded by a full length coding sequence or by any portion of the coding sequence so long as the desired activity or functional properties (e.g., enzymatic activity, ligand binding, signal transduction, immunogenicity, etc.) of the full-length or fragment is retained.
  • the term also encompasses the coding region of a structural gene and the sequences preceding and following the coding region, (leader and trailer) as well as intervening sequences (introns) between individual coding segments (exons). Sequences located 5′ of the coding region and present on the mRNA are referred to as 5′ non-translated sequences. Sequences located 3′ or downstream of the coding region and present on the mRNA are referred to as 3′ non-translated sequences.
  • the term “gene” encompasses both cDNA and genomic forms of a gene.
  • a genomic form or clone of a gene contains the coding region interrupted with non-coding sequences termed “introns” or “intervening regions” or “intervening sequences.”
  • Introns are segments of a gene that are transcribed into nuclear RNA (hnRNA); introns may contain regulatory elements such as enhancers. Introns are removed or “spliced out” from the nuclear or primary transcript; introns therefore are absent in the messenger RNA (mRNA) transcript.
  • mRNA messenger RNA
  • RNA expression refers to the process of converting genetic information encoded in a gene into RNA (e.g., mRNA, rRNA, tRNA, micro RNA or snRNA) through “transcription” of the gene (i.e., via the enzymatic action of an RNA polymerase), and for protein encoding genes, into protein through “translation” of mRNA.
  • Gene expression can be regulated at many stages in the process.
  • Up-regulation” or “activation” refers to regulation that increases the production of gene expression products (i.e., RNA or protein), while “down-regulation” or “repression” refers to regulation that decrease production.
  • Molecules e.g., transcription factors
  • activators e.g., transcription factors
  • genomic forms of a gene may also include sequences located on both the 5′ and 3′ end of the sequences that are present on the RNA transcript. These sequences are referred to as “flanking” sequences or regions (these flanking sequences are located 5′ or 3′ to the non-translated sequences present on the mRNA transcript).
  • the 5′ flanking region (or upstream region) may contain regulatory sequences such as promoters and enhancers that control or influence the transcription of the gene.
  • the 3′ flanking region may contain sequences that direct the termination of transcription, post-transcriptional cleavage and polyadenylation.
  • nucleic acid molecule encoding As used herein, the terms “nucleic acid molecule encoding,” “DNA sequence encoding,” and “DNA encoding” refer to the order or sequence of deoxyribonucleotides along a strand of deoxyribonucleic acid. The order of these deoxyribonucleotides determines the order of amino acids along the polypeptide (protein) chain. The DNA sequence thus codes for the amino acid sequence.
  • oligonucleotide as used herein is defined as a molecule with two or more deoxyribonucleotides or ribonucleotides, often more than three, and usually more than ten. The exact size of an oligonucleotide will depend on many factors, including the ultimate function or use of the oligonucleotide. Oligonucleotides can be prepared by any suitable method, including, for example, cloning and restriction of appropriate sequences and direct chemical synthesis by a method such as the phosphotriester method of Narang et al., 1979, Meth.
  • DNAi oligonucleotide refers to a single stranded nucleic acid oligonucleotide or derivative thereof, whose sequence is complementary, in part, to a portion of the longest non-transcribed region of a gene in which the oligonucleotide affects indirectly or directly the expression, regulation or production of the same or different gene, wherein the longest non-transcribed region includes any portion of the gene that is not transcribed when the transcriptional start site is the site closest to the translation start site.
  • DNAi does not include RNAi and antisense oligonucleotides that base pair only with mRNAs or pre-mRNAs and interfere with RNA processing and/or message translation.
  • nucleotide, dC is replaced by 5-methyl-dC where appropriate, as taught by the present invention.
  • the DNAi oligonucleotides may comprise, without limitation, oligonucleotide mimetics such as are described below.
  • the DNAi oligonucleotide compounds in accordance with this invention may comprise from about 15 to about 35 nucleobases (i.e., from about 15 to about 35 linked bases), although both longer and shorter sequences may find use with the present invention.
  • Oligonucleotides may also include nucleobase (often referred to in the art simply as “base”) modifications or substitutions.
  • base include the purine bases adenine (A) and guanine (G), and the pyrimidine bases thymine (T), 16182651.1 cytosine (C) and uracil (U).
  • Modified nucleobases include other synthetic and natural nucleobases.
  • the DNAi oligonucleotides may hybridizes to the promoter region of a gene. In some embodiments, the hybridization of the DNAi oligonucleotide to the promoter inhibits expression of the gene.
  • promoter is meant a sequence sufficient to direct transcription, including promoter elements that are sufficient to render promoter-dependent gene expression controllable for cell-type specific, tissue-specific, or inducible by external signals or agents; such elements may be located in the 5′ or 3′ regions of the gene. Both constitutive and inducible promoters, are included in the definition (see e.g., Bitter et al., Methods in Enzymology 153:516-544, 1987). For example, when cloning in bacterial systems, inducible promoters such as pL of bacteriophage ⁇ , plac, ptrp, ptac (ptrp-lac hybrid promoter) and the like may be used.
  • promoters derived from the genome of mammalian cells (e.g., metallothionein promoter) or from mammalian viruses (e.g., the retrovirus long terminal repeat; the adenovirus late promoter; the vaccinia virus 7.5K promoter) may be used. Promoters produced by recombinant DNA or synthetic techniques are also defined as promoters.
  • the “regulatory region” of a gene is any part of a gene that regulates the expression of a gene, including, without limitation, transcriptional and translational regulation.
  • the regions include without limitation the 5′ and 3′ regions of genes, binding sites for regulatory factors, including without limitation transcription factor binding sites.
  • the regions also include regions that are as long as 20,000 or more base pairs upstream or downstream of translational start sites, so long as the region is involved in any way in the regulation of the expression of the gene.
  • the region may be as short as 20 base pairs or as long as thousands of base pairs.
  • transformation or “transfection” is meant a permanent or transient genetic change induced in a cell following incorporation of new DNA (i.e., DNA exogenous to the cell).
  • new DNA i.e., DNA exogenous to the cell.
  • a permanent genetic change is generally achieved by introduction of the DNA into the genome of the cell.
  • transformed cell or “host cell” is meant a cell (e.g., prokaryotic or eukaryotic) into which (or into an ancestor of which) has been introduced, by means of recombinant DNA techniques, a DNA molecule encoding a polypeptide of the invention (i.e., a Methuselah polypeptide), or fragment thereof.
  • a cell e.g., prokaryotic or eukaryotic
  • a DNA molecule encoding a polypeptide of the invention i.e., a Methuselah polypeptide
  • Transformation of a host cell with recombinant DNA may be carried out by conventional techniques as are well known to those skilled in the art.
  • the host is prokaryotic, such as E. coli
  • competent cells which are capable of DNA uptake can be prepared from cells harvested after exponential growth phase and subsequently treated by the CaCl 2 method by procedures well known in the art.
  • CaCl 2 or RbCl can be used. Transformation can also be performed after forming a protoplast of the host cell or by electroporation.
  • complementarity are used in reference to polynucleotides (i.e., a sequence of nucleotides) related by the base-pairing rules. For example, for the sequence “A-G-T,” is complementary to the sequence “T-C-A.” Complementarity may be “partial,” in which only some of the nucleic acids' bases are matched according to the base pairing rules. Or, there may be “complete” or “total” complementarity between the nucleic acids. The degree of complementarity between nucleic acid strands has significant effects on the efficiency and strength of hybridization between nucleic acid strands.
  • the term “completely complementary,” for example when used in reference to a DNAi oligonucleotide of the present invention refers to an oligonucleotide where all of the nucleotides are complementary to a target sequence (e.g., a gene).
  • partially complementary refers to a sequence where at least one nucleotide is not complementary to the target sequence. Preferred partially complementary sequences are those that can still hybridize to the target sequence under physiological conditions.
  • partially complementary refers to sequences that have regions of one or more non-complementary nucleotides both internal to the sequence or at either end. Sequences with mismatches at the ends may still hybridize to the target sequence.
  • a partially complementary sequence is a nucleic acid molecule that at least partially inhibits a completely complementary nucleic acid molecule from hybridizing to a target nucleic acid is “substantially homologous.”
  • the inhibition of hybridization of the completely complementary sequence to the target sequence may be examined using a hybridization assay (Southern or northern blot, solution hybridization and the like) under conditions of low stringency.
  • a substantially homologous sequence or probe will compete for and inhibit the binding (i.e., the hybridization) of a completely homologous nucleic acid molecule to a target under conditions of low stringency.
  • a substantially complementary sequence or probe will compete for and inhibit the binding (i.e., the hybridization) of a completely complementary nucleic acid molecule to a target under conditions of low stringency.
  • conditions of low stringency are such that non-specific binding is permitted; low stringency conditions require that the binding of two sequences to one another be a specific (i.e., selective) interaction.
  • the absence of non-specific binding may be tested by the use of a second target that is substantially non-complementary (e.g., less than about 30% identity); in the absence of non-specific binding the probe will not hybridize to the second non-complementary target.
  • substantially homologous refers to any probe that can hybridize to either or both strands of the double-stranded nucleic acid sequence under conditions of low stringency as described above.
  • substantially homologous refers to any probe that can hybridize (i.e., it is the complement of) the single-stranded nucleic acid sequence under conditions of low stringency as described above.
  • hybridization is used in reference to the pairing of complementary nucleic acids. Hybridization and the strength of hybridization (i.e., the strength of the association between the nucleic acids) is impacted by such factors as the degree of complementary between the nucleic acids, stringency of the conditions involved, the T m of the formed hybrid, and the G:C ratio within the nucleic acids. A single molecule that contains pairing of complementary nucleic acids within its structure is said to be “self-hybridized.”
  • T m is used in reference to the “melting temperature.”
  • the melting temperature is the temperature at which a population of double-stranded nucleic acid molecules becomes half dissociated into single strands.
  • Inhibition of hybridization of the completely complementary sequence to the target sequence may be examined using a hybridization assay (Southern or northern blot, solution hybridization and the like) under conditions of low stringency.
  • a substantially homologous sequence or probe will compete for and inhibit the binding (i.e., the hybridization) of a completely homologous nucleic acid molecule to a target under conditions of low stringency. This is not to say that conditions of low stringency are such that non-specific binding is permitted; low stringency conditions require that the binding of two sequences to one another be a specific (i.e., selective) interaction.
  • the absence of non-specific binding may be tested by the use of a second target that is substantially non-complementary (e.g., less than about 30% identity); in the absence of non-specific binding the probe will not hybridize to the second non-complementary target.
  • substantially homologous refers to any probe that can hybridize to either or both strands of the double-stranded nucleic acid sequence under conditions of low stringency as described above.
  • stringency is used in reference to the conditions of temperature, ionic strength and the presence of other compounds such as organic solvents, under which nucleic acid hybridizations are conducted.
  • low stringency conditions a nucleic acid sequence of interest will hybridize to its exact complement, sequences with single base mismatches, closely related sequences (e.g., sequences with 90% or greater homology), and sequences having only partial homology (e.g., sequences with 50-90% homology).
  • intermediate stringency conditions a nucleic acid sequence of interest will hybridize only to its exact complement, sequences with single base mismatches, and closely relation sequences (e.g., 90% or greater homology).
  • a nucleic acid sequence of interest will hybridize only to its exact complement, and (depending on conditions such a temperature) sequences with single base mismatches. In other words, under conditions of high stringency the temperature can be raised so as to exclude hybridization to sequences with single base mismatches.
  • physiological conditions refers to specific stringency conditions that approximate or are conditions inside an animal (e.g., a human).
  • exemplary physiological conditions for use in vitro include, but are not limited to, 37° C., 95% air, 5% CO 2 , commercial medium for culture of mammalian cells (e.g., DMEM media available from Gibco, Md.), 5-10% serum (e.g., calf serum or horse serum), additional buffers, and optionally hormone (e.g., insulin and epidermal growth factor).
  • isolated means altered “by the hand of man” from its natural state; i.e., if it occurs in nature, it has been changed or removed from its original environment or both.
  • an isolated nucleotide or “isolated polynucleotide” refers to a nucleic acid sequence that is identified and separated from at least one component or contaminant with which it is ordinarily associated in its natural source. Isolated nucleic acid as such present in a form or setting that is different from that in which it is found in nature.
  • non-isolated nucleic acids are nucleic acids such as DNA and RNA found in the state they exist in nature.
  • a given DNA sequence e.g., a gene
  • RNA sequences such as a specific mRNA sequence encoding a specific protein
  • isolated nucleic acid encoding a given protein includes, by way of example, such nucleic acid in cells ordinarily expressing the given protein where the nucleic acid is in a chromosomal location different from that of natural cells, or is otherwise flanked by a different nucleic acid sequence than that found in nature.
  • the isolated nucleic acid, oligonucleotide or polynucleotide may be present in single-stranded or double-stranded form.
  • the oligonucleotide or polynucleotide will contain at a minimum the sense or coding strand (i.e., the oligonucleotide or polynucleotide may be single-stranded), but may contain both the sense and anti-sense strands (i.e., the oligonucleotide or polynucleotide may be double-stranded).
  • purified refers to removing components (e.g., contaminants) from a sample.
  • components e.g., contaminants
  • purify refers to removing components (e.g., contaminants) from a sample.
  • recombinant polypeptides are expressed in bacterial host cells and the polypeptides are purified by removing host cell proteins; the percent of recombinant polypeptides is thereby increased in the sample.
  • cell culture refers to any in vitro culture of cells. Included within this term are continuous cell lines (e.g., with an immortal phenotype), primary cell cultures, transformed cell lines, finite cell lines (e.g., non-transformed cells), and any other cell population maintained in vitro.
  • eukaryote refers to organisms distinguishable from “prokaryotes.” It is intended that the term encompass all organisms with cells that exhibit the usual characteristics of eukaryotes, such as the presence of a true nucleus bounded by a nuclear membrane, within which lie the chromosomes, the presence of membrane-bound organelles and other characteristics commonly observed in eukaryotic organisms. Thus, the term includes, but is not limited to such organisms as fungi, protozoa and animals (e.g., humans).
  • in vitro refers to an artificial environment and to processes or reactions that occur within an artificial environment.
  • in vitro environments can consist of, but are not limited to, test tubes and cell culture.
  • in vivo refers to the natural environment (e.g., an animal or a cell) and to processes or reaction that occur within a natural environment.
  • the term “under conditions such that expression of a gene is inhibited” refers to conditions where a DNAi oligonucleotide of the present invention hybridizes to a gene (e.g., the promoter region of the gene) and inhibits transcription of the gene by at least 10%, at least 25%, at least 50% or at least 90% relative to the level of transcription in the absence of the oligonucleotide.
  • the term “under conditions such that growth of a cell is reduced” refers to conditions where a DNAi oligonucleotide of the present invention, when administered to a cell (e.g., a cancer) reduces the rate of growth of the cell by at least 10%, at least 25%, at least 50% or at least 90% relative to the rate of growth of the cell in the absence of the oligonucleotide.
  • test compound and “candidate compound” refer to any chemical entity, pharmaceutical, drug, biologic and the like that is a candidate for use to treat or prevent a disease, illness, sickness, or disorder of bodily function (e.g., cancer).
  • Test compounds include both known and potential therapeutic compounds.
  • a test compound can be determined to be therapeutic by screening using the screening methods of the present invention.
  • the mixture includes a DNAi oligonucleotide a test compound such as an antisense compound or a chemotherapy agent.
  • chemotherapeutic agents refers to compounds that can be useful in the treatment of disease (e.g., cancer).
  • chemotherapeutic agents affective against cancer include, without limitation, daunorubicin, dactinomycin, doxorubicin, bleomycin, mitomycin, nitrogen mustard, chlorambucil, melphalan, cyclophosphamide, 6-mercaptopurine, 6-thioguanine, cytarabine (CA), 5-fluorouracil (5-FU), floxuridine (5-FUdR), methotrexate (MTX), colchicine, taxotere, vincristine, vinblastine, etoposide, teniposide, cisplatin and diethylstilbestrol (DES).
  • daunorubicin dactinomycin
  • doxorubicin bleomycin
  • mitomycin nitrogen mustard
  • chlorambucil melphalan
  • cyclophosphamide 6-mercaptopur
  • aliphatic encompasses the terms alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, each of which being optionally substituted as set forth below.
  • an “alkyl” group refers to a saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group containing 1-8 (e.g., 1-6 or 1-4) carbon atoms.
  • An alkyl group can be straight or branched. Examples of alkyl groups include, but are not limited to, methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, n-pentyl, n-heptyl or 2-ethylhexyl.
  • An alkyl group can be substituted (i.e., optionally substituted) with one or more substituents such as halo, cycloaliphatic, heterocycloaliphatic, aryl, heteroaryl, alkoxy, aroyl, heteroaroyl, cycloaliphaticcarbonyl, (heterocycloaliphatic)carbonyl, nitro, cyano, amino, amido, acyl, sulfonyl, sulfinyl, sulfanyl, sulfoxy, urea, thiourea, sulfamoyl, sulfamide, oxo, carboxy, carbamoyl, cycloaliphaticoxy, heterocycloaliphaticoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, aralkyloxy, heteroarylalkoxy, or hydroxy.
  • substituents such as halo, cycloaliphatic, heterocycloaliphatic, aryl, heteroaryl,
  • substituted alkyls include carboxyalkyl (such as HOOC-alkyl, alkoxycarbonylalkyl and alkylcarbonyloxyalkyl), cyanoalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, alkoxyalkyl, acylalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, aralkyl, (alkoxyaryl)alkyl, (sulfonylamino)alkyl (such as (alkylsulfonylamino)alkyl), aminoalkyl, amidoalkyl, (cycloaliphatic)alkyl, cyanoalkyl, or haloalkyl.
  • carboxyalkyl such as HOOC-alkyl, alkoxycarbonylalkyl and alkylcarbonyloxyalkyl
  • cyanoalkyl such as HOOC-alkyl, alkoxycarbonylalkyl and alkylcarbonyloxyalkyl
  • cyanoalkyl such as HOOC-al
  • an “alkenyl” group refers to an aliphatic carbon group that contains 2-8 (e.g., 2-6 or 2-4) carbon atoms and at least one double bond. Like an alkyl group, an alkenyl group can be straight or branched. Examples of an alkenyl group include, but are not limited to, allyl, isoprenyl, 2-butenyl and 2-hexenyl.
  • An alkenyl group can be optionally substituted with one or more substituents such as halo, cycloaliphatic, heterocycloaliphatic, aryl, heteroaryl, alkoxy, aroyl, heteroaroyl, (cycloaliphatic)carbonyl, (heterocycloaliphatic)carbonyl, nitro, cyano, amino, amido, acyl, sulfonyl, sulfinyl, sulfanyl, sulfoxy, urea, thiourea, sulfamoyl, sulfamide, oxo, carboxy, carbamoyl, (cycloaliphatic)oxy, (heterocycloaliphatic)oxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, aralkyloxy, (heteroaryl)alkoxy, or hydroxy.
  • substituents such as halo, cycloaliphatic, heterocycloaliphatic, aryl, heteroary
  • an “alkynyl” group refers to an aliphatic carbon group that contains 2-8 (e.g., 2-6 or 2-4) carbon atoms and has at least one triple bond.
  • An alkynyl group can be straight or branched. Examples of an alkynyl group include, but are not limited to, propargyl and butynyl.
  • An alkynyl group can be optionally substituted with one or more substituents such as halo, cycloaliphatic, heterocycloaliphatic, aryl, heteroaryl, alkoxy, aroyl, heteroaroyl, (cycloaliphatic)carbonyl, (heterocycloaliphatic)carbonyl, nitro, cyano, amino, amido, acyl, sulfonyl, sulfinyl, sulfanyl, sulfoxy, urea, thiourea, sulfamoyl, sulfamide, oxo, carboxy, carbamoyl, (cycloaliphatic)oxy, (heterocycloaliphatic)oxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, aralkyloxy, (heteroaryl)alkoxy, or hydroxy.
  • substituents such as halo, cycloaliphatic, heterocycloaliphatic, aryl, hetero
  • an “amido” encompasses both “aminocarbonyl” and “carbonylamino”. These terms when used alone or in connection with another group refers to an amido group such as N(R X ) 2 —C(O)— or R Y C(O)—N(R X ) 2 — when used terminally and —C(O)—N(R X )— or —N(R X )—C(O)— when used internally, wherein R X and R Y are defined below.
  • amido groups include alkylamido (such as alkylcarbonylamino and alkylcarbonylamino), (heterocycloaliphatic)amido, (heteroaralkyl)amido, (heteroaryl)amido, (heterocycloalkyl)alkylamido, arylamido, aralkylamido, (cycloalkyl)alkylamido, and cycloalkylamido.
  • alkylamido such as alkylcarbonylamino and alkylcarbonylamino
  • heterocycloaliphatic such as alkylcarbonylamino and alkylcarbonylamino
  • heteroaryl heteroaryl
  • an “amino” group refers to —NR X R Y wherein each of R X and R Y is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloaliphatic, (cycloaliphatic)aliphatic, aryl, araliphatic, heterocycloaliphatic, (heterocycloaliphatic)aliphatic, heteroaryl, carboxy, sulfanyl, sulfinyl, sulfonyl, (aliphatic)carbonyl, (cycloaliphatic)carbonyl, ((cycloaliphatic)aliphatic)carbonyl, arylcarbonyl, (araliphatic)carbonyl, (heterocycloaliphatic)carbonyl, ((heterocycloaliphatic)aliphatic)carbonyl, (heteroaryl)carbonyl, or (heteroaraliphatic)carbonyl, each of which being defined herein and being optionally substituted.
  • amino groups include alkylamino
  • amino is not the terminal group (e.g., alkylcarbonylamino), it is represented by —NR X —.
  • R X has the same meaning as defined above.
  • an “aryl” group used alone or as part of a larger moiety as in “aralkyl”, “aralkoxy”, or “aryloxyalkyl” refers to monocyclic (e.g., phenyl); bicyclic (e.g., indenyl, naphthalenyl, tetrahydronaphthyl, tetrahydroindenyl); and tricyclic (e.g., fluorenyl tetrahydrofluorenyl, or tetrahydroanthracenyl, anthracenyl).
  • the bicyclic and tricyclic groups include benzofused 2-3 membered carbocyclic rings.
  • a benzofused group includes phenyl fused with two or more C 4-8 carbocyclic moieties.
  • An aryl is optionally substituted with one or more substituents including aliphatic [e.g., alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl]; cycloaliphatic; (cycloaliphatic)aliphatic; heterocycloaliphatic; (heterocycloaliphatic)aliphatic; aryl; heteroaryl; alkoxy; (cycloaliphatic)oxy; (heterocycloaliphatic)oxy; aryloxy; heteroaryloxy; (araliphatic)oxy; (heteroaraliphatic)oxy; aroyl; heteroaroyl; amino; oxo (on a non-aromatic carbocyclic ring of a benzofused bicyclic or tricyclic aryl); nitro; carboxy; amido; acyl [e.g., aliphaticcarbonyl; (cycloali
  • Non-limiting examples of substituted aryls include haloaryl [e.g., mono-, di (such as p,m-dihaloaryl), and (trihalo)aryl]; (carboxy)aryl [e.g., (alkoxycarbonyl)aryl, ((aralkyl)carbonyloxy)aryl, and (alkoxycarbonyl)aryl]; (amido)aryl [e.g., (aminocarbonyl)aryl, (((alkylamino)alkyl)aminocarbonyl)aryl, (alkylcarbonyl)aminoaryl, (arylaminocarbonyl)aryl, and (((heteroaryl)amino)carbonyl)aryl]; aminoaryl [e.g., ((alkylsulfonyl)amino)aryl and ((dialkyl)amino)aryl]; (cyanoalkyl)aryl; (alk
  • an “araliphatic” such as an “aralkyl” group refers to an aliphatic group (e.g., a C 1-4 alkyl group) that is substituted with an aryl group. “Aliphatic,” “alkyl,” and “aryl” are defined herein. An example of an araliphatic such as an aralkyl group is benzyl.
  • a “bicyclic ring system” includes 8-12 (e.g., 9, 10, or 11) membered structures that form two rings, wherein the two rings have at least one atom in common (e.g., 2 atoms in common).
  • Bicyclic ring systems include bicycloaliphatics (e.g., bicycloalkyl or bicycloalkenyl), bicycloheteroaliphatics, bicyclic aryls, and bicyclic heteroaryls.
  • cycloaliphatic encompasses a “cycloalkyl” group and a “cycloalkenyl” group, each of which being optionally substituted as set forth below.
  • a “cycloalkyl” group refers to a saturated carbocyclic mono- or bicyclic (fused or bridged) ring of 3-10 (e.g., 5-10) carbon atoms.
  • Examples of cycloalkyl groups include cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl, adamantyl, norbornyl, cubyl, octahydro-indenyl, decahydro-naphthyl, bicyclo[3.2.1]octyl, bicyclo[2.2.2]octyl, bicyclo[3.3.1]nonyl, bicyclo[3.3.2.]decyl, bicyclo[2.2.2]octyl, adamantyl, azacycloalkyl, or ((aminocarbonyl)cycloalkyl)cycloalkyl.
  • a “cycloalkenyl” group refers to a non-aromatic carbocyclic ring of 3-10 (e.g., 4-8) carbon atoms having one or more double bonds.
  • Examples of cycloalkenyl groups include cyclopentenyl, 1,4-cyclohexa-di-enyl, cycloheptenyl, cyclooctenyl, hexahydro-indenyl, octahydro-naphthyl, cyclohexenyl, cyclopentenyl, bicyclo[2.2.2]octenyl, and bicyclo[3.3.1]nonenyl.
  • a cycloalkyl or cycloalkenyl group can be optionally substituted with one or more substituents such as aliphatic [e.g., alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl], cycloaliphatic, (cycloaliphatic) aliphatic, heterocycloaliphatic, (heterocycloaliphatic) aliphatic, aryl, heteroaryl, alkoxy, (cycloaliphatic)oxy, (heterocycloaliphatic)oxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, (araliphatic)oxy, (heteroaraliphatic)oxy, aroyl, heteroaroyl, amino, amido [e.g., (aliphatic)carbonylamino, (cycloaliphatic)carbonylamino, ((cycloaliphatic)aliphatic)carbonylamino, (aryl)carbonylamino, (araliphatic)carbonylamino, (heterocycloaliphatic)carbon
  • cyclic moiety includes cycloaliphatic, heterocycloaliphatic, aryl, or heteroaryl, each of which has been defined previously.
  • heterocycloaliphatic encompasses a heterocycloalkyl group and a heterocycloalkenyl group, each of which being optionally substituted as set forth below.
  • heterocycloalkyl refers to a 3-10 membered mono- or bicylic (fused or bridged) (e.g., 5- to 10-membered mono- or bicyclic) saturated ring structure, in which one or more of the ring atoms is a heteroatom (e.g., N, O, S, or combinations thereof).
  • heterocycloalkyl group examples include piperidyl, piperazyl, tetrahydropyranyl, tetrahydrofuryl, 1,4-dioxolanyl, 1,4-dithianyl, 1,3-dioxolanyl, oxazolidyl, isoxazolidyl, morpholinyl, thiomorpholyl, octahydro-benzofuryl, octahydro-chromenyl, octahydro-thiochromenyl, octahydro-indolyl, octahydro-pyrindinyl, decahydro-quinolinyl, octahydro-benzo[b]thiopheneyl, 2-oxa-bicyclo[2.2.2]octyl, 1-aza-bicyclo[2.2.2]octyl, 3-aza-bicyclo[3.2.1]octyl, and 2,
  • a monocyclic heterocycloalkyl group can be fused with a phenyl moiety such as tetrahydroisoquinoline.
  • a “heterocycloalkenyl” group refers to a mono- or bicylic (e.g., 5- to 10-membered mono- or bicyclic) non-aromatic ring structure having one or more double bonds, and wherein one or more of the ring atoms is a heteroatom (e.g., N, O, or S).
  • Monocyclic and bicycloheteroaliphatics are numbered according to standard chemical nomenclature.
  • a heterocycloalkyl or heterocycloalkenyl group can be optionally substituted with one or more substituents such as aliphatic [e.g., alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl], cycloaliphatic, (cycloaliphatic) aliphatic, heterocycloaliphatic, (heterocycloaliphatic) aliphatic, aryl, heteroaryl, alkoxy, (cycloaliphatic)oxy, (heterocycloaliphatic)oxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, (araliphatic)oxy, (heteroaraliphatic)oxy, aroyl, heteroaroyl, amino, amido [e.g., (aliphatic)carbonylamino, (cycloaliphatic)carbonylamino, ((cycloaliphatic) aliphatic)carbonylamino, (aryl)carbonylamino, (araliphatic)carbonylamino, (heterocycloaliphatic)
  • heteroaryl group refers to a monocyclic, bicyclic, or tricyclic ring structure having 4 to 15 ring atoms wherein one or more of the ring atoms is a heteroatom (e.g., N, O, S, or combinations thereof) and wherein one ore more rings of the bicyclic or tricyclic ring structure is aromatic.
  • a heteroaryl group includes a benzofused ring system having 2 to 3 rings.
  • a benzofused group includes benzo fused with one or two 4 to 8 membered heterocycloaliphatic moieties (e.g., indolizyl, indolyl, isoindolyl, 3H-indolyl, indolinyl, benzo[b]furyl, benzo[b]thiophenyl, quinolinyl, or isoquinolinyl).
  • heterocycloaliphatic moieties e.g., indolizyl, indolyl, isoindolyl, 3H-indolyl, indolinyl, benzo[b]furyl, benzo[b]thiophenyl, quinolinyl, or isoquinolinyl.
  • heteroaryl examples include azetidinyl, pyridyl, 1H-indazolyl, furyl, pyrrolyl, thienyl, thiazolyl, oxazolyl, imidazolyl, tetrazolyl, benzofuryl, isoquinolinyl, benzthiazolyl, xanthene, thioxanthene, phenothiazine, dihydroindole, benzo[1,3]dioxole, benzo[b]furyl, benzo[b]thiophenyl, indazolyl, benzimidazolyl, benzthiazolyl, puryl, cinnolyl, quinolyl, quinazolyl, cinnolyl, phthalazyl, quinazolyl, quinoxalyl, isoquinolyl, 4H-quinolizyl, benzo-1,2,5-thiadiazolyl, or
  • monocyclic heteroaryls include furyl, thiophenyl, 2H-pyrrolyl, pyrrolyl, oxazolyl, thazolyl, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl, isoxazolyl, isothiazolyl, 1,3,4-thiadiazolyl, 2H-pyranyl, 4-H-pranyl, pyridyl, pyridazyl, pyrimidyl, pyrazolyl, pyrazyl, or 1,3,5-triazyl.
  • Monocyclic heteroaryls are numbered according to standard chemical nomenclature.
  • bicyclic heteroaryls include indolizyl, indolyl, isoindolyl, 3H-indolyl, indolinyl, benzo[b]furyl, benzo[b]thiophenyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, indazolyl, benzimidazyl, benzthiazolyl, purinyl, 4H-quinolizyl, quinolyl, isoquinolyl, cinnolyl, phthalazyl, quinazolyl, quinoxalyl, 1,8-naphthpidyl, or pteridyl.
  • Bicyclic heteroaryls are numbered according to standard chemical nomenclature.
  • a heteroaryl is optionally substituted with one or more substituents such as aliphatic [e.g., alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl]; cycloaliphatic; (cycloaliphatic)aliphatic; heterocycloaliphatic; (heterocycloaliphatic)aliphatic; aryl; heteroaryl; alkoxy; (cycloaliphatic)oxy; (heterocycloaliphatic)oxy; aryloxy; heteroaryloxy; (araliphatic)oxy; (heteroaraliphatic)oxy; aroyl; heteroaroyl; amino; oxo (on a non-aromatic carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring of a bicyclic or tricyclic heteroaryl); nitro; carboxy; amido; acyl [e.g., aliphaticcarbonyl; (cycloaliphatic)carbonyl; ((cycloaliphatic)aliphatic)carbonyl; (araliphatic)carbon
  • Non-limiting examples of substituted heteroaryls include (halo)heteroaryl [e.g., mono- and di-(halo)heteroaryl]; (carboxy)heteroaryl [e.g., (alkoxycarbonyl)heteroaryl]; cyanoheteroaryl; aminoheteroaryl [e.g., ((alkylsulfonyl)amino)heteroaryl and ((dialkyl)amino)heteroaryl]; (amido)heteroaryl [e.g., aminocarbonylheteroaryl, ((alkylcarbonyl)amino)heteroaryl, ((((alkyl)amino)alkyl)aminocarbonyl)heteroaryl, (((heteroaryl)amino)carbonyl)heteroaryl, ((heteroaryl)amino)carbonyl)heteroaryl, (
  • heteroaralkyl refers to an aliphatic group (e.g., a C 1-4 alkyl group) that is substituted with a heteroaryl group.
  • aliphatic group e.g., a C 1-4 alkyl group
  • heteroaryl e.g., a C 1-4 alkyl group
  • an “acyl” group refers to a formyl group or R X —C(O)— (such as -alkyl-C(O)—, also referred to as “alkylcarbonyl”) where R X and “alkyl” have been defined previously.
  • Acetyl and pivaloyl are examples of acyl groups.
  • alkoxy refers to an alkyl-O— group where “alkyl” has been defined previously.
  • a “carbamoyl” group refers to a group having the structure —O—CO—NR X R Y or —NR X —CO—O—R Z wherein R X and R Y have been defined above and R Z can be aliphatic, aryl, araliphatic, heterocycloaliphatic, heteroaryl, or heteroaraliphatic.
  • a “carboxy” group refers to —COOH, —COOR X , —OC(O)H, —OC(O)R X when used as a terminal group or —OC(O)— or —C(O)O—; when used as an internal group.
  • haloaliphatic refers to an aliphatic group substituted with 1-3 halogen.
  • haloalkyl includes the group —CF 3 .
  • mercapto refers to —SH.
  • a “sulfo” group refers to —SO 3 H or —SO 3 R X when used terminally or —S(O)3- when used internally.
  • a “sulfamide” group refers to the structure —NR X —S(O) 2 —NR Y R Z when used terminally and —NRX—S(O) 2 —NR Y — when used internally, wherein R X , R Y , and R Z have been defined above.
  • a “sulfamoyl” group refers to the structure —S(O) 2 —NR X R Y or —NR X —S(O) 2 —R Z when used terminally or —S(O) 2 —NR X — or —NR X —S(O) 2 — when used internally, wherein R X , R Y , and R Z are defined above.
  • sulfanyl group refers to —S—R X when used terminally and —S— when used internally, wherein R X has been defined above.
  • sulfanyls include alkylsulfanyl.
  • sulfinyl refers to —S(O)—R X when used terminally and —S(O)— when used internally, wherein R X has been defined above.
  • a “sulfonyl” group refers to —S(O) 2 —R X when used terminally and —S(O) 2 — when used internally, wherein R X has been defined above.
  • a “sulfoxy” group refers to —O—SO—R X or —SO—O—R X , when used terminally and —O—S(O)— or —S(O)—O— when used internally, where R X has been defined above.
  • halogen or “halo” group refers to fluorine, chlorine, bromine or iodine.
  • alkoxycarbonyl which is encompassed by the term carboxy, used alone or in connection with another group refers to a group such as alkyl-O—C(O)—.
  • alkoxyalkyl refers to an alkyl group such as alkyl-O-alkyl-, wherein alkyl has been defined above.
  • carbonyl refers to —C(O)—.
  • an “oxo” refers to ⁇ O.
  • aminoalkyl refers to the structure (R X ) 2 N-alkyl-.
  • cyanoalkyl refers to the structure (NC)-alkyl-
  • urea refers to the structure —NR X —CO—NR Y R Z and a “thiourea” group refers to the structure —NR X —CS—NR Y R Z when used terminally and —NR X —CO—NR Y — or —NR X —CS—NR Y — when used internally, wherein R X , R′′, and R Z have been defined above.
  • guanidine refers to the structure —N ⁇ C(N(R X R Y ))N(R X R Y ) wherein R X and R Y have been defined above.
  • amino refers to the structure —C ⁇ (NR X )N(R X R Y ) wherein R X and R Y have been defined above.
  • terminal and “internally” refer to the location of a group within a substituent.
  • a group is terminal when the group is present at the end of the substituent not further bonded to the rest of the chemical structure.
  • Carboxyalkyl i.e., R X O(O)C-alkyl is an example of a carboxy group used terminally.
  • a group is internal when the group is present in the middle of a substituent to at the end of the substituent bound to the to the rest of the chemical structure.
  • Alkylcarboxy e.g., alkyl-C(O)O— or alkyl-OC(O)—
  • alkylcarboxyaryl e.g., alkyl-C(O)O-aryl- or alkyl-O(CO)-aryl-
  • Each substituent of a specific group is further optionally substituted with one to three of halo, cyano, oxoalkoxy, hydroxyl, amino, nitro, aryl, haloalkyl, and alkyl.
  • an alkyl group can be substituted with alkylsulfanyl and the alkylsulfanyl can be optionally substituted with one to three of halo, cyano, oxoalkoxy, hydroxyl, amino, nitro, aryl, haloalkyl, and alkyl.
  • the cycloalkyl portion of a (cycloalkyl)carbonylamino can be optionally substituted with one to three of halo, cyano, alkoxy, hydroxyl, nitro, haloalkyl, and alkyl.
  • the two alkoxy groups can form a ring together with the atom(s) to which they are bound.
  • substituted refers to the replacement of hydrogen radicals in a given structure with the radical of a specified substituent.
  • Specific substituents are described above in the definitions and below in the description of compounds and examples thereof.
  • an optionally substituted group can have a substituent at each substitutable position of the group, and when more than one position in any given structure can be substituted with more than one substituent selected from a specified group, the substituent can be either the same or different at every position.
  • a ring substituent such as a heterocycloalkyl
  • substituents envisioned by this invention are those combinations that result in the formation of stable or chemically feasible compounds.
  • stable or chemically feasible refers to compounds that are not substantially altered when subjected to conditions to allow for their production, detection, and preferably their recovery, purification, and use for one or more of the purposes disclosed herein.
  • an effective amount is defined as the amount required to confer a therapeutic effect on the treated patient, and is typically determined based on age, surface area, weight and condition of the patient.
  • the interrelationship of dosages for animals and humans (based on milligrams per meter squared of body surface) is described by Freireich et al., Cancer Chemother. Rep., 50: 219 (1966).
  • Body surface area can be approximately determined from height and weight of the patient. See, e.g., Scientific Tables, Geigy Pharmaceuticals, Ardsley, N.Y., 537 (1970).
  • structures depicted herein are also meant to include all isomeric (e.g., enantiomeric, diastereomeric, and geometric (or conformational)) forms of the structure; for example, the R and S configurations for each asymmetric center, (Z) and (E) double bond isomers, and (Z) and (E) conformational isomers. Therefore, single stereochemical isomers as well as enantiomeric, diastereomeric, and geometric (or conformational) mixtures of the present compounds are within the scope of the invention. Unless otherwise stated, all tautomeric forms of the compounds of the invention are within the scope of the invention.
  • structures depicted herein are also meant to include compounds that differ only in the presence of one or more isotopically enriched atoms.
  • compounds having the present structures except for the replacement of hydrogen by deuterium or tritium, or the replacement of a carbon by a 13 C- or 14 C-enriched carbon are within the scope of this invention.
  • Such compounds are useful, for example, as analytical tools or probes in biological assays.
  • the present invention provides antigene inhibitors of oncogenes.
  • the present invention is not limited to the inhibition of a particular oncogene. Indeed, the present invention encompasses antigene inhibitors to any number of oncogenes including, but not limited to, those disclosed herein.
  • c-Ha-ras One gene which has captured the attention of many scientists is the human proto-oncogene, c-Ha-ras. This gene acts as a central dispatcher, relaying chemical signals into cells and controlling cell division. Ras gene alteration may cause the gene to stay in the “on” position.
  • the ras oncogene is believed to underlie up to 30% of cancer, including colon cancer, lung cancer, bladder and mammary carcinoma (Bos, Cancer Res. 49:4682-4689 [1989]). The ras oncogene has therefore become a target for therapeutic drugs.
  • Oligonucleotides complementary to the 5′ flanking region of the c-Ha-ras RNA transcript have shown to inhibit tumor growth in nude mice for up to 14 days (Gray et al., Cancer Res. 53:577-580 [1993]). It was recently reported that an antisense oligonucleotide directed to a point mutation (G>C) in codon 12 of the c-Ha-ras mRNA inhibited cell proliferation as well as tumor growth in nude mice when it was injected subcutaneously (U.S. Pat. No. 5,576,208; U.S. Pat. No. 5,582,986; Schwab et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci.
  • the -her-2 also known as neu oncogene or erbB-2
  • oncogene encodes a receptor-like tyrosine kinase (RTK) that has been extensively investigated because of its role in several human carcinomas (Hynes and Stern, Biochim. et Biophy. Acta 1198:165-184 [1994]; Dougall et al., Oncogene 9:2109-2123 [1994]) and in mammalian development (Lee et al., Nature 378:394-398 [1995]).
  • RTK receptor-like tyrosine kinase
  • transmembrane receptor also known as p185
  • tyrosine kinase activity is a member of the epidermal growth factor (EGF) family, and thus is related to the epidermal growth factor receptor (EGFR or HER-1).
  • EGF epidermal growth factor
  • HER-2 Aberrant her-2 gene expression is present in a wide variety of cancers and is most common in breast, ovarian and gastric cancers.
  • HER-2 is overexpressed in 25-30% of all human breast and ovarian cancers. Levels of HER-2 overexpression correlate well with clinical stage of breast cancer, prognosis and metastatic potential. Overexpression of HER-2 is associated with lower survival rates, increased relapse rates and increased metastatic potential. Tan et al., (Cancer Res., 57:1199 [1997]) have shown that overexpression of the HER-2 gene increases the metastatic potential of breast cancer cells without increasing their transformation ability.
  • Aberrant expression of HER-2 includes both increased expression of normal HER-2 and expression of mutant HER-2.
  • Activation of the her-2 proto-oncogene can occur by any of three mechanisms—point mutation, gene amplification and overexpression. Gene amplification is the most common mechanism. Unlike the other EGF family members for whom ligand activation is necessary for promoting transformation, overexpression of HER-2 alone is sufficient for transformation (Cohen, et al., J. Biol. Chem., 271:30897 [1996]).
  • the adenovirus type 5 gene product E1A has been studied as a potential therapeutic using a breast cancer model in nude mice. This gene product can repress her-2/neu overexpression by repressing her-2/neu promoter activity, and suppress the tumorigenic potential of her-2/neu-overexpressing ovarian cancer cells. In mice bearing her-2/neu-overexpressing breast cancer xenografts, E1A delivered either by adenovirus or liposome significantly inhibited tumor growth and prolonged mouse survival compared with the controls (Chang et al., Oncogene 14:561 [1997]).
  • HER-2 Overexpression of HER-2 has also been found to be associated with increased resistance to chemotherapy. Thus, patients with elevated levels of HER-2 respond poorly to many drugs. Methods used to inhibit HER-2 expression have been combined with commonly used chemotherapeutic agents (Ueno et al., Oncogone 15:953 [1997]). Combining the adenovirus type 5 gene product, E1A, with taxol showed a synergistic effect in human breast cancer cells.
  • Oligonucleotides have also been used to study the function of HER-2.
  • a triplex-forming oligonucleotide targeted to the her-2 promoter, 42 to 69 nucleotides upstream of the mRNA transcription start site was found to inhibit HER-2 expression in vitro (Ebbinghaus et al., J. Clin. Invest., 92:2433 [1993]).
  • Porumb et al. (Cancer Res., 56:515 [1996]) also used a triplex-forming oligonucleotide targeted to the same her-2 promoter region. Decreases in her-2 mRNA and protein levels were seen in cultured cells. Juhl et al. (J. Biol.
  • Chem., 272:29482 [1997]) used anti-her-2 ribozymes targeted to a central region of the her-2 RNA just downstream of the transmembrane region of the protein to demonstrate a reduction in her-2 mRNA and protein levels in human ovarian cancer cells. A reduction in tumor growth in nude mice was also seen.
  • the c-myc gene product is encoded by an immediate early response gene, the expression of which can be induced by various mitogens. C-myc expression is involved in signal transduction pathways leading to cell division. Studies have demonstrated that proliferating cells have higher levels of c-myc mRNA and c-myc protein than do quiescent cells. Antibodies directed against the human c-myc protein are known to inhibit DNA synthesis in nuclei isolated from human cells. Conversely, constitutive expression of c-myc produced by gene transfer inhibits induced differentiation of several cell lines. Constitutive expression of c-myc predisposes transgenic mice to the development of tumors.
  • c-myc gene product may play a proliferative role in smooth muscle cells (SMCs). Balloon de-endothelialization and injury of rat aortas is known to increase c-myc mRNA expression of vascular SMC prior to their subsequent proliferation and migration. Also, SMCs in culture proliferate when exposed to several mitogens, including PDGF, FGF, EGF, IGF-1 and to serum. Each of these mitogens has been found to be capable of increasing the expression in other cell lines of either c-myc protein, c-myc mRNA, or both. Additionally, blood serum has been found to increase c-myc mRNA levels in SMCs.
  • mitogens including PDGF, FGF, EGF, IGF-1 and to serum.
  • the bcl-2 gene is overexpressed, and may be associated with tumorigenicity (Tsujimoto et al., Science 228:1440-1443 [1985]). High levels of expression of the bcl-2 gene have been found in all lymphomas with t (14; 18) chromosomal translocations including most follicular B cell lymphomas and many large cell non-Hodgkin's lymphomas.
  • TGF- ⁇ Transforming Growth Factor Alpha
  • EGF Epidermal Growth Factor
  • EGFR Epidermal Growth Factor Receptor
  • EGF Receptor Epidermal Growth Factor Receptor
  • TGF- ⁇ and EGF are believed to exert their biological effects via interaction with the Epidermal Growth Factor Receptor (EGF Receptor).
  • EGF Receptor is a Type 1 receptor tyrosine kinase.
  • the EGF Receptor and its ligands are of interest for their roles in normal physiological processes as well as in hyperproliferative and neoplastic diseases.
  • TGF- ⁇ The in vivo precursor of TGF- ⁇ is a 160 amino acid residue membrane-bound protein (pro-TGF-.alpha.) that is cleaved to yield a soluble compound (Massague, J. Biol. Chem., 265:21393-21396 [1990]).
  • This cleavage removes an extracellular portion comprised of 50 amino acids with a molecular weight of 6 Kd and is considered to be an important regulatory event (Pandiella et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 88:1726-1730 [1990]) that can be stimulated by phorbol esters acting via protein kinase C (Pandiella et al., J. Biol. Chem., 266:5769-5773 [1991]).
  • TGF- ⁇ shows that TGF- ⁇ mRNA and proliferate in response to TGF- ⁇ (Wilding et al., The Prostate, 15:1-12 [1989]). TGF- ⁇ appears to have both autocrine and paracrine function, stimulating physiologic activities such as cell division and angiogenesis. When induced in transgenic mice, TGF- ⁇ produced epithelial hyperplasia and focal dysplastic changes that resembled carcinoma in situ (Sandgren et al., Cell, 61:1121-1135 [1990]).
  • KRAS The c-Ki-Ras (KRAS) oncogene is expressed ubiquitously. KRAS, with a length of more than 30 kb, is much larger than HRAS or NRAS. Although the 3 ras genes, HRAS, KRAS, and NRAS, have different genetic structures, all code for proteins of 189 amino acid residues, generically designated p21. These genes acquire malignant properties by single point mutations that affect the incorporation of the 12th or 61st amino acid residue of their respective p21. KRAS is involved in malignancy much more often than is HRAS.
  • Genomic DNA was examined from 39 tumor specimens obtained at thoracotomy.
  • the KRAS gene was found to be activated by point mutations in codon 12 in 5 of 10 adenocarcinomas. Two of these tumors were less than 2 cm in size and had not metastasized. No HRAS, KRAS, or NRAS mutations were observed in 15 squamous cell carcinomas, 10 large cell carcinomas, 1 carcinoid, 2 metastatic adenocarcinomas from primary tumors outside the lung, and 1 small cell carcinoma.
  • the present invention is not limited to the oncogenes described above.
  • the methods of the present invention are suitable for use with any oncogene with a known promoter region.
  • the present invention is not limited to the targeting of oncogenes.
  • the methods and compositions of the present invention find use in the targeting of any gene of which it is desirable to down regulate the expression.
  • the genes to be targeted include, but are not limited to, an immunoglobulin or antibody gene, a clotting factor gene, a protease, a pituitary hormone, a protease inhibitor, a growth factor, a somatomedian, a gonadotrophin, a chemotactin, a chemokine, a plasma protein, a plasma protease inhibitor, an interleukin, an interferon, a cytokine, a transcription factor, or a pathogen target (e.g., a viral gene, a bacterial gene, a microbial gene, a fungal gene).
  • a pathogen target e.g., a viral gene, a bacterial gene, a microbial gene, a fungal gene.
  • genes include, but are not limited to, ADAMTS4, ADAMTS5, APOA1, APOE, APP, B2M, COX2, CRP, DDX25, DMC1, FKBP8, GH1, GHR, IAPP, IFNA1, IFNG, ILL 1110, IL12, IL13, IL2, IL4, IL7, IL8, IPW, MAPK14, Mei1, MMP13, MYD88, NDN, PACE4, PRNP, PSEN1, PSEN2, RAD51, RAD51C, SAP, SNRPN, TLR4, TLR9, TTR, UBE3A, VLA-4, and PTP-1B, c-RAF, m-TOR, LDL, VLDL, ApoB-100, HDL, VEGF, rhPDGF-BB, NADs, ICAM-1, MUC1, 2-dG, CTL, PSGL-1, E2F, NF-kB, HIF, and GCPRs.
  • a gene from a pathogen is targeted.
  • pathogens include, without limitation, Human Immunodeficiency virus, Hepatitis B virus, hepatitis C virus, hepatitis A virus, respiratory syncytial virus, pathogens involved in severe acute respiratory syndrome, west nile virus, and food borne pathogens (e.g., E. coli ).
  • lipids that are suitable for use in the compositions in accordance with the present invention.
  • the membrane anchors of the lipids are shown exemplarily and serve only to illustrate the lipids of the invention and are not intended to limit the same.
  • Amphoteric liposomes represent a recently described class of liposomes having anionic or neutral charge at about pH 7.5 and cationic charge at pH 4.
  • Using amphoteric liposomes as carriers of DNAi oligonucleotides according to the present invention to treat cancer in cells and in mammals, such as by inhibiting and/or reducing tumor growth, requires that the liposomes be stable in the bloodstream and in tissues.
  • the DNAI oligonucleotides must be stably sequestered in the liposomes until eventual uptake in the target tissue or cells. Accordingly, the guidelines for liposomal formulations of the FDA regulate specific preclinical tests for liposomal drugs (http://www.fda.gov/cder/guidance/2191dft.pdf). For example, the ratio of encapsulated drug to free drug must be determined during the circulation time in the blood stream.
  • liposomes After injection of liposomes into the blood stream, serum components interact with the liposomes and can lead to permeabilization of the liposomes.
  • release of a drug or molecule that is encapsulated in a liposome depends on molecular dimensions of the drug or molecule. Consequently, a plasmid of thousands of base pairs is released much more slowly than smaller oligonucleotides or other small molecules.
  • amphoteric liposomes of the mixture according to the present invention include one or more amphoteric lipids or alternatively a mix of anionic and cationic lipid components with amphoteric properties.
  • Suitable amphoteric lipids are disclosed in PCT International Publication Number WO02/066489 as well as in PCT International Publication Number WO03/070735, the contents of both of which are incorporated herein by reference.
  • the lipid phase may be formulated using pH-responsive anionic and/or cationic components, as disclosed in PCT International Publication Number WO02/066012, the contents of which are incorporated by reference herein.
  • Cationic lipids sensitive to pH are disclosed in PCT International Publication Numbers WO02/066490 and WO03/070220, in Budker, et al. 1996, Nat. Biotechnol. 14(6):760-4, and in U.S. Pat. No. 6,258,792 the contents of which are incorporated by reference herein, and can be used in combination with constitutively charged anionic lipids or with anionic lipids that are sensitive to pH.
  • the cationic charge may also be introduced from constitutively charged lipids that are known to those skilled in the art in combination with a pH sensitive anionic lipid.
  • the mixtures of the present invention include 1) amphoteric lipids or a mixture of lipid components with amphoteric properties 2) neutral lipids; and 3) one or more DNAi oligonucleotides as defined above.
  • Amphoteric lipids are disclosed in PCT International Publication Numbers WO02/066489 and WO03/070735, the contents of both of which are incorporated herein by reference.
  • the overall molecule assumes its pH-dependent charge characteristics by the simultaneous presence of cationic and anionic groups in the “amphoteric substance” molecule portion. More specifically, an amphoteric substance is characterized by the fact that the sum of its charge components will be precisely zero at a particular pH value. This point is referred to as isoelectric point (IP). Above the IP, the compound has a negative charge, and below the IP it is to be regarded as a positive cation, the IP of the amphoteric lipids ranging between 4.5 and 8.5.
  • IP isoelectric point
  • the overall charge of the molecule at a particular pH value of the medium can be calculated as follows:
  • a compound is formed by coupling the amino group of histidine to cholesterol hemisuccinate.
  • the product has a negative charge because the carboxyl function which is present therein is in its fully dissociated form, and the imidazole function only has low charge.
  • an acid pH value of about 4 the situation is reversed: the carboxyl function now is largely discharged, while the imidazole group is essentially fully protonated, and the overall charge of the molecule therefore is positive.
  • the amphoteric lipid is selected from the group consisting of HistChol, HistDG, isoHistSuccDG, Acylcarnosine and HCChol. In another embodiment, the amphoteric lipid is HistChol.
  • Amphoteric lipids can include, without limitation, derivatives of cationic lipids which include an anionic substituent.
  • Amphoteric lipids include, without limitation, the compounds having the structure of the formula:
  • the HET is an optionally substituted heterocycloaliphatic including at least one nitrogen ring atom, or an optionally substituted heteroaryl including at least one nitrogen ring atom.
  • the HET is morpholinyl, piperidinyl, piperazinlyl, pyrimidinyl, or pyridinyl.
  • the cationic lipid has the structure Sterol-X-spacer1-Y-spacer2-morpholinyl or Sterol-X-spacer1-Y-spacer2-imidazolyl.
  • the sterol is cholesterol.
  • amphoteric lipids include, without limitation, the compounds having the structure of the formula:
  • the HET is an optionally substituted heterocycloaliphatic including at least one nitrogen ring atom, or an optionally substituted heteroaryl including at least one nitrogen ring atom.
  • the HET is morpholinyl, piperidinyl, piperazinlyl, pyrimidinyl, or pyridinyl.
  • the cationic lipid has the structure Sterol-X-spacer1-Y-spacer2-morpholinyl or Sterol-X-spacer1-Y-spacer2-imidazolyl.
  • the sterol is cholesterol.
  • the lipid phase can be formulated using pH-responsive anionic and/or cationic components, as disclosed in PCT International Publication Number WO02/066012, the contents of which are incorporated by reference herein.
  • Cationic lipids sensitive to pH are disclosed in PCT International Publication Numbers WO02/066490 and WO03/070220, in Budker, et al. (1996), Nat Biotechnol. 14(6):760-4, and in U.S. Pat. No. 6,258,792, the contents of all of which are incorporated by reference herein.
  • the cationic charge may be introduced from constitutively charged lipids known to those skilled in the art in combination with a pH sensitive anionic lipid.
  • the mixture of lipid components may comprise (i) a stable cationic lipid and a chargeable anionic lipid, (ii) a chargeable cationic lipid and chargeable anionic lipid or (iii) a stable anionic lipid and a chargeable cationic lipid.
  • the charged groups can be divided into the following 4 groups.
  • weakly cationic, pKa ⁇ 9, net positive charge on the basis of their chemical nature, these are, in particular, nitrogen bases such as piperazines, imidazoles and morpholines, purines or pyrimidines.
  • nitrogen bases such as piperazines, imidazoles and morpholines, purines or pyrimidines.
  • Such molecular fragments, which occur in biological systems, are, for example, 4-imidazoles (histamine), 2-, 6-, or 9-purines (adenines, guanines, adenosines or guanosines), 1-, 2- or 4-pyrimidines (uracils, thymines, cytosines, uridines, thymidines, cytidines) or also pyridine-3-carboxylic acids (nicotinic esters or amides).
  • Nitrogen bases with preferred pKa values are also formed by substituting nitrogen atoms one or more times with low molecular weight alkane hydroxyls, such as hydroxymethyl or hydroxyethyl groups.
  • alkane hydroxyls such as hydroxymethyl or hydroxyethyl groups.
  • aminodihydroxypropanes triethanolamines, tris-(hydroxymethyl)methylamines, bis-(hydroxymethyl)methylamines, tris-(hydroxyethyl)methylamines, bis-(hydroxyethyl)methylamines or the corresponding substituted ethylamines.
  • weakly anionic, pKa>4, net negative charge on the basis of their chemical nature, these are, in particular, the carboxylic acids. These include the aliphatic, linear or branched mono-, di- or tricarboxylic acids with up to 12 carbon atoms and 0, 1 or 2 ethylenically unsaturated bonds. Carboxylic acids of suitable behavior are also found as substitutes of aromatic systems. Other weakly anionic groups are hydroxyls or thiols, which can dissociate and occur in ascorbic acid, N-substituted alloxane, N-substituted barbituric acid, veronal, phenol or as a thiol group.
  • amphoteric liposomes contain variable amounts of such membrane-forming or membrane-based amphiphilic materials, so that they have an amphoteric character. This means that the liposomes can change the sign of the charge completely.
  • the amount of charge carrier of a liposome, present at a given pH of the medium can be calculated using the following formula:
  • cationic components include DPIM, CHIM, DORIE, DDAB, DAC-Chol, TC-Chol, DOTMA, DOGS, (C18) 2 Gly + N,N-dioctadecylamido-glycine, CTAB, CPyC, DODAP DMTAP, DPTAP, DOTAP, DC-Chol, MoChol, HisChol and DOEPC.
  • cationic lipids include DMTAP, DPTAP, DOTAP, DC-Chol, MoChol and HisChol.
  • pH sensitive cationic lipids are disclosed in PCT International Publication Numbers WO 02/066490 as well as in and WO 03/070220, the contents of both of which are incorporated herein by reference.
  • pH sensitive cationic lipids can be compounds having the structure of the formula
  • the HET is an optionally substituted heterocycloaliphatic including at least one nitrogen ring atom, or an optionally substituted heteroaryl including at least one nitrogen ring atom.
  • the HET is morpholinyl, piperidinyl, piperazinlyl, pyrimidinyl or pyridinyl.
  • the cationic lipid has the structure Sterol-X-spacer1-Y-spacer2-morpholinyl or Sterol-X-spacer1-Y-spacer2-imidazolyl.
  • the sterol is cholesterol.
  • X is —O—
  • Spacer 1 and Spacer 2 are (CH 2 ) 2
  • Y is —(C ⁇ O)—NH—
  • HET is morpholinyl
  • X is ⁇ CH—
  • Spacer 1 and Spacer 2 are (CH 2 ) 2
  • Y is —(C ⁇ O)—NH—
  • HET is morpholinyl
  • X is —CH 2 —
  • Spacer 1 and Spacer 2 are (CH 2 ) 2
  • Y is —(C ⁇ O)—NH—
  • HET is morpholinyl.
  • X is ⁇ N—O—, Spacer 1 is —CH 2 —, Y is —(C ⁇ O)—NH—, Spacer 2 is (CH 2 ) 2 HET is morpholinyl.
  • X is ⁇ N—NH—, Spacer 1 is —CH 2 —, Y is —(C ⁇ O)—NH—, Spacer 2 is (CH 2 ) 2 and HET is morpholinyl.
  • X is ⁇ N—NH—(C ⁇ O)—, Spacer 1 is —CH 2 —, Y is —(C ⁇ O)—NH—, Spacer 2 is (CH 2 ) 2 and HET is morpholinyl.
  • X is —NH—(C ⁇ O)—
  • Spacer 1 is —CH 2 —
  • Y is —(C ⁇ O)—NH—
  • Spacer 2 is (CH 2 ) 2
  • HET is morpholinyl.
  • X is —NH—
  • Spacer 1 and Spacer 2 are (CH 2 ) 2
  • Y is —(C ⁇ O)—NH—
  • HET is morpholinyl.
  • X is —NH—(SO 2 ) n —
  • Spacer 1 is —CH 2 —
  • Y is —(C ⁇ O)—NH—
  • Spacer 2 is (CH 2 ) 2 and HET is morpholinyl, wherein n is 1 or 2.
  • X is —S(O 2 )—NH—
  • Spacer 1 is —CH 2 —
  • Y is —(C ⁇ O)—NH—
  • Spacer 2 is (CH 2 ) 2 and HET is morpholinyl.
  • the above compounds can be synthesized using syntheses of 1 or more steps, and can be prepared by one skilled in the art.
  • pH sensitive cationic lipids can be compounds having the structure of the formula
  • the HET is an optionally substituted heterocycloaliphatic including at least one nitrogen ring atom, or an optionally substituted heteroaryl including at least one nitrogen ring atom.
  • the HET is morpholinyl, piperidinyl, piperazinlyl, pyrimidinyl or pyridinyl.
  • the cationic lipid has the structure Sterol-X-spacer1-Y-spacer2-morpholinyl or Sterol-X-spacer1-Y-spacer2-imidazolyl.
  • the sterol is cholesterol.
  • the amphoteric mixtures further comprise anionic lipids, either constitutively or conditionally charged in response to pH, and such lipids are also known to those skilled in the art.
  • lipids for use with the invention include DOGSucc, POGSucc, DMGSucc, DPGSucc, DMPS, DPPS, DOPS, POPS, DMPG, DPPG, DOPG, POPG, DMPA, DPPA, DOPA, POPA, CHEMS, CetylP, DGSucc, and combinations thereof.
  • Neutral lipids include any lipid that remains neutrally charged at a pH between about 4 and 9.
  • Neutral lipids include, without limitation, cholesterol, other sterols and derivatives thereof, phospholipids, and combinations thereof and other neutral lipids.
  • the phospholipids include any one phospholipid or combination of phospholipids capable of forming liposomes. They include phosphatidylcholines, phosphatidylethanolamines, lecithin and fractions thereof, phosphatidic acid, phosphatidylglycerols, phosphatidylinolitols, phosphatidylserines, plasmalogens and sphingomyelins.
  • the phosphatidylcholines include, without limitation, those obtained from egg, soy beans or other plant sources or those that are partially or wholly synthetic or of variable lipid chain length and unsaturation, POPC, OPPC, natural or hydrogenated soy bean PC, natural or hydrogenated egg PC, DMPC, DPPC, DSPC, DOPC and derivatives thereof.
  • phosphatidylcholines are POPC, non-hydrogenated soy bean PC and non-hydrogenated egg PC.
  • Phosphatidylethanolamines include, without limitation, DOPE, DMPE and DPPE and derivatives thereof.
  • Phosphatidylglycerols include, without limitation, DMPG, DLPG, DPPG, and DSPG.
  • Phosphatidic acids include, without limitation, DSPA, DMPA, DLPA and DPPA.
  • Sterols include cholesterol derivatives such as 3-hydroxy-5,6-cholestene and related analogs, such as 3-amino-5,6-cholestene and 5,6-cholestene, cholestane, cholestanol and related analogs, such as 3-hydroxy-cholestane; and charged cholesterol derivatives such as cholesteryl-beta-alanine and cholesterol hemisuccinate.
  • neutral lipids include ⁇ -tocopherols and derivatives, such as a-tocopherol acetate.
  • neutral lipids include without limitation, DOPE, POPC, soy bean PC or egg PC and cholesterol.
  • the bcl-2 gene has two promoters designated P1 and P2.
  • P1 from which most bcl-2 mRNA is transcribed is located approximately 1.4 kb upstream of the translation initiation site and P2 is 1.3 kb downstream of P1.
  • P1 is GC-rich, lacks a TATA box, has many transcription start sites and includes seven consensus binding sites for the SP1 transcription factor.
  • P2 includes a CCAAT box and a TATA box and has two different transcription initiation sites. There are multiple NF- ⁇ B recognition sites and an SV40 enhancer-like octamer motif within P2.
  • 5′-bcl-2 breakpoint regions that result from fusions with either the IgH locus or two different immunoglobulin light chain (IgL) loci that are found in some DLCL lymphoma patient isolates.
  • IgL immunoglobulin light chain
  • TGF- ⁇ , c-ki-ras, c-myc, c-erb-2 (Her-2), and c-Ha-ras can also be investigated to find regions to which DNAi oligonucleotides could bind based on preferred design criteria.
  • the DNAi oligonucleotides are DNA oligomers that are complementary to either the plus strand or minus strand of double stranded DNA.
  • the DNAi oligonucleotide may hybridize to regulatory regions of the c-ki-ras, c-Ha-ras, c-myc, her-2, TGF- ⁇ , or bcl-2 gene.
  • those upstream regions are defined as SEQ ID NO:1 (for her-2, or c-erb-2), SEQ ID NO:282 (for c-ki-ras), SEQ ID NO:462 (for c-Ha-ras), SEQ ID NO:936 (for c-myc), SEQ ID NO:1081 (for TGF- ⁇ ) and SEQ ID NOs:1249 and 1254 (for bcl-2), provided that the DNAi oligonucleotide is a single stranded nucleic acid oligonucleotide or derivative thereof, whose sequence is complementary, in part, to a portion of the longest non-transcribed region of a gene in which the oligonucleotide affects indirectly or directly the expression, regulation or production of the same or different gene, wherein the longest non-transcribed region includes any portion of the gene that is not transcribed when the transcriptional start site is the site closest to the translation start site.
  • DNAi oligonucleotide is
  • the DNAi oligonucleotides may be designed based on certain design criteria. Such DNAi oligonucleotides can then be tested for efficacy using the methods disclosed herein. For example, in some embodiments, the DNAi oligonucleotides are methylated on at least one, two or all of the CpG islands. In other embodiments, the DNAi oligonucleotides contain no methylation.
  • the present invention is not limited to a particular mechanism. Indeed, an understanding of the mechanism is not necessary to practice the present invention. Nonetheless, it is contemplated that DNAi oligonucleotides in some embodiments are those that have at least a 50% GC content and at least two GC dinucleotides.
  • the DNAi oligonucleotides do not self hybridize. In further embodiments, the DNAi oligonucleotides are designed with at least 1 A or T to minimize self hybridization. In yet further embodiments, commercially available computer programs are used to survey the DNAi oligonucleotides for the ability to self hybridize. In still other embodiments, the DNAi oligonucleotides are at least 10, or 15 nucleotides and no more than 100 nucleotides in length. In further embodiments, DNAi oligonucleotides are 18-26 nucleotides in length. In some embodiments, DNAi oligonucleotides comprise the universal protein binding sequences CGCCC and CGCG or the complements thereof.
  • the DNAi oligonucleotides hybridize to a regulatory region of a gene upstream from the TATA box of the promoter. In further embodiments, DNAi oligonucleotides are designed to hybridize to regulatory regions of an oncogene known to be bound by proteins (e.g., transcription factors). In some embodiments, the DNAi oligonucleotide compounds are not completely homologous to other regions of the human genome. The homology of the DNAi oligonucleotides to other regions of the genome can be determined using available search tools (e.g., BLAST, available at the internet site of NCBI).
  • available search tools e.g., BLAST, available at the internet site of NCBI.
  • the present invention is not limited to the specific DNAi oligonucleotide sequences described herein.
  • Other suitable DNAi oligonucleotides may be identified (e.g., using the criteria described above or other criteria).
  • Candidate DNAi oligonucleotides may be tested for efficacy using any suitable method. For example, candidate DNAi oligonucleotides can be evaluated for their ability to prevent cell proliferation at a variety of concentrations. In some embodiments, DNAi oligonucleotides inhibit gene expression or cell proliferation at a low concentration (e.g., less that 20 ⁇ M, or 10 ⁇ M in in vitro assays).
  • regions within the regulatory regions of the oncogenes are further defined as regions for hybridization of DNAi oligonucleotides. In some embodiments, these regions are referred to as “hot zones.”
  • hot zones are defined based on DNAi oligonucleotide compounds that are demonstrated to be effective (see above section on DNAi oligonucleotides) and those that are contemplated to be effective based on the criteria for DNAi oligonucleotides described above.
  • hot zones encompass 10 by upstream and downstream of each compound included in each hot zone and have at least one CG or more within an increment of 40 by further upstream or downstream of each compound.
  • hot zones encompass a maximum of 100 bp upstream and downstream of each oligonucleotide compound included in the hot zone.
  • hot zones are defined at beginning regions of each promoter. These hot zones are defined either based on effective sequence(s) or contemplated sequences and have a preferred maximum length of 200 bp. Based on the above described criteria, exemplary hot zones were designed. These hot zones are shown in Table 1.
  • the DNAi oligonucleotides can be any DNAi oligomer that hybridizes under physiological conditions to the following sequences: SEQ ID NO:1, SEQ ID NO:282, SEQ ID NO:462, SEQ ID NO:936, SEQ ID NO:1081, SEQ ID NOs:1249 and/or 1254.
  • the DNAi oligonucleotides can be any DNAi oligomer that hybridizes under physiological conditions to exemplary hot zones in SEQ ID NO:1, SEQ ID NO:282, SEQ ID NO:462, SEQ ID NO:936, SEQ ID NO:1081 and SEQ ID NO:1249.
  • DNai oligomers examples include, without limitation, those DNAi oligomers listed in SEQ ID NOs 2-281, 283-461, 463-935, 937-1080, 1082-1248, 1250-1253 and 1267-1447 and the complements thereof.
  • the DNAi oligonucleotides are SEQ ID NOs 2-22, 283-301, 463-503, 937-958, 1082-1109, 1250-1254 and 1270-1447 and the complements thereof.
  • the DNAi oligonucleotides are from 15-35 base pairs in length.
  • the DNAi oligomers can include any DNAi oligomer that hybridizes to SEQ ID NOs: 1249 or 1254.
  • the DNAi oligomer can be any oligomer that hybridizes to nucleotides 500-2026, nucleotides 500-1525, nucleotides 800-1225, nucleotides 900-1125, nucleotides 950-1075 or nucleotides 970-1045 of SEQ ID NO:1249 or the complement thereof.
  • the DNAi oligonucleotides can be any DNAi oligomer that hybridizes under physiological conditions to exemplary hot zones in SEQ ID NO:1249.
  • DNAi oligomers examples include, without limitation, those DNai oligomers listed in SEQ ID NOs 1250-1253 and 1267-1447 and the complements thereof. In an embodiment of these aspects, the DNAi oligonucleotides are from 15-35 base pairs in length.
  • the DNAi oligomer can be SEQ ID NO:1250, 1251, 1252, 1253, 1267-1447 or the complement thereof. In yet another embodiment, the DNAi oligomer can be SEQ ID NO:1250, 1251, 1267, 1268, 1276, 1277, 1285, 1286 or the complement thereof. In still another embodiment, the DNAi oligomer can be SEQ ID NOs 1250, 1251, 1289-1358 or the complements thereof. In an additional embodiment the DNAi oligomer can be SEQ ID NO:1250 or 1251.
  • the DNAi oligomer has the sequence of the positive strand of the bcl-2 sequence, and thus, binds to the negative strand of the sequence.
  • the DNAi oligomers can include mixtures of DNAi oligonucleotides.
  • the DNAi oligomer can include multiple DNAi oligonucleotides, each of which hybridizes to different parts of SEQ ID NOs 1249 and 1254.
  • DNAi oligomers can hybridize to overlapping regions on those sequences or the DNAi oligomers may hybridize to non-overlapping regions.
  • DNAi oligomers can be SEQ ID NOs 1250, 1251, 1252, 1253, 1267-1447 or the complement thereof, wherein the mixture of DNAi oligomers comprises DNAi oligomers of at least 2 different sequences.
  • the DNAi oligomer can include a mixture of DNAi oligomers, each of which hybridizes to a regulatory region of different genes.
  • the DNAi oligomer can include a first DNAi oligomer that hybridizes to SEQ ID NO:1249 or 1254 and a second DNAi oligomer that hybridizes to a regulatory region of a second gene.
  • the DNAi oligomer includes a DNAi oligomer of SEQ ID NOs 1250-1254 or 1267-1447 or the complements thereof, and a DNAi oligomer that hybridizes to SEQ ID NO:1, SEQ ID NO:282, SEQ ID NO:462, SEQ ID NO:936, or SEQ ID NO:1081 or the complement thereof.
  • the DNAi oligomer includes SEQ ID NO 1250 or 1251 or the complement thereof and a DNAi oligomer that hybridizes to SEQ ID NO:1, SEQ ID NO:282, SEQ ID NO:462, SEQ ID NO:936, or SEQ ID NO:1081 or the complement thereof.
  • the DNAi oligomer includes SEQ ID NO:1250 or 1251 or the complement thereof and any of SEQ ID NOs 2-281, 283-461, 463-935, 937-1080 and 1082-1248, or the complement thereof.
  • the present invention provides DNAi oligonucleotide therapeutics that are methylated at specific sites.
  • the present invention is not limited to a particular mechanism. Indeed, an understanding of the mechanism is not necessary to practice the present invention. Nonetheless, it is contemplated that one mechanism for the regulation of gene activity is methylation of cytosine residues in DNA.
  • 5-methylcytosine (5-MeC) is the only naturally occurring modified base detected in DNA (Ehrlick et al., Science 212:1350-1357 (1981)).
  • 5-methylcytosine 5-MeC
  • hypomethylation at specific sites or in specific regions in a number of genes is correlated with active transcription (Doerfler, Ann. Rev. Biochem.
  • DNA methylation in vitro can prevent efficient transcription of genes in a cell-free system or transient expression of transfected genes. Methylation of C residues in some specific cis-regulatory regions can also block or enhance binding of transcriptional factors or repressors (Doerfler, supra; Christman, supra; Cedar, Cell 34:5503-5513 (1988); Tate et al., Curr. Opin. Genet. Dev. 3:225-231 [1993]; Christman et al., Virus Strategies, eds. Doerfler, W. & Bohm, P. (VCH, Weinheim, N.Y.) pp. 319-333 [1993]).
  • methylation inhibitors such as L-methionine or 5-azacytodine or severe deficiency of 5-adenosine methionine through feeding of a diet depleted of lipotropes has been reported to induce formation of liver tumors in rats (Wainfan et al., Cancer Res. 52:2071s-2077s [1992]).
  • extreme lipotrope deficient diets can cause loss of methyl groups at specific sites in genes such as c-myc, ras and c-fos (Dizik et al., Carcinogenesis 12:1307-1312 [1991]).
  • Hypomethylation occurs despite the presence of elevated levels of DNA MTase activity (Wainfan et al., Cancer Res.
  • the mixture of the present invention may be adapted for site specific methylation of specific gene promoters, thereby preventing transcription and hence translation of certain genes.
  • the mixture of the present invention may be adapted for upregulating the expression of a gene of interest (e.g., a tumor suppressor gene) by altering the gene's methylation patterns.
  • the present invention is not limited to the use of methylated DNAi oligonucleotides. Indeed, the use of non-methylated DNAi oligonucleotides for the inhibition of gene expression is specifically contemplated by the present invention.
  • the DNAi oligonucleotides can be in a naturally occurring state, and can also contain modifications or substitutions in the nucleobases, the sugar moiety and/or in the internucleoside linkage.
  • Nucleobases comprise naturally occurring nucleobases as well as non-naturally occurring nucleobases.
  • Illustrative examples of such nucleobases include without limitation adenine, cytosine, 5-methylcytosine, isocytosine, pseudoisocytosine, guanine, thymine, uracil, 5-bromouracil, 5-propynyluracil, 5-propynylcytosine, 5-propyny-6-fluoroluracil, 5-methylthiazoleuracil, 6-aminopurine, 2-aminopurine, inosine, diaminopurine, 7-deazaguanine, 7-deazaadenine, 3-deazaguanine, 3-deazaadenine, 8-azaguanine, 8-azaadenine, 7-propyne-7-deazaadenine, 7-propyne-7-deazaguanine, 2-chloro-6-aminopurine, 4-acetylcyto
  • the DNAi oligonucleotides can also have sugars other than ribose and deoxy ribose, including arabinofuranose (described in International Publication number WO 99/67378, which is herein incorporated by reference), xyloarabinofuranose (described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,316,612 and 6,489,465, which are herein incorporated by reference), ⁇ -threofuranose (Schöning, et al. (2000) Science, 290, 1347-51, which is herein incorporated by reference) and L-ribofuranose.
  • Sugar mimetics can replace the sugar in the nucleotides. They include cyclohexene (Wang et al. (2000) J. Am.
  • the DNAi oligonucleotides can also include “locked nucleic acids” or LNAs.
  • LNAs can be bicyclic, tricyclic or polycyclic. LNAs include a number of different monomers, one of which is depicted in Formula I.
  • an LNA or LNA* nucleotide can also include “locked nucleic acids” with other furanose or other 5 or 6-membered rings and/or with a different monomer formulation, including 2′-Y,3′ linked and 3′-Y,4′ linked, 1′-Y,3 linked, 1′-Y,4′ linked, 3′-Y,5′ linked, 2′-Y, 5′ linked, 1′-Y,2′ linked bicyclonucleosides and others.
  • LNA oligonucleotides and LNA nucleotides are generally described in International Publication No. WO 99/14226 and subsequent applications; International Publication Nos. WO 00/56746, WO 00/56748, WO 00/66604, WO 01/25248, WO 02/28875, WO 02/094250, WO 03/006475; U.S. Pat. Nos.
  • LNA oligonucleotides and LNA analogue oligonucleotides are commercially available from, for example, Proligo LLC 6200 Lookout Road, Boulder, Colo. 80301 USA.
  • the nucleotide derivatives of the DNAi oligonucleotides can include nucleotides containing one of the following at the 2′ sugar position: OH; F; O-, S-, or N-alkyl; O-, S-, or N-alkenyl; O-, S- or N-alkynyl; or O-alkyl-O-alkyl, wherein the alkyl, alkenyl and alkynyl may be substituted or unsubstituted C 1 to C 10 alkyl or C 2 to C 10 alkenyl and alkynyl, O[(CH 2 ) n O] m CH 3 , O(CH 2 ) n OCH 3 , O(CH 2 ) n NH 2 , O(CH 2 ) n CH 3 , O(CH 2 ) n ONH 2 , and O(CH 2 ) n ON[(CH 2 ) n CH 3 )] 2 , where n and m are from
  • the DNAi oligonucleotides have non-natural internucleoside linkages.
  • oligonucleotides having modified backbones include those that retain a phosphorus atom in the backbone and those that do not have a phosphorus atom in the backbone.
  • modified oligonucleotides that do not have a phosphorus atom in their internucleoside backbone can also be considered to be oligonucleosides.
  • Some modified DNAi oligonucleotide backbones include, for example, phosphorothioates, chiral phosphorothioates, phosphorodithioates, phosphoroselenates, phosphotriesters, aminoalkylphosphotriesters, methyl and other alkyl phosphonates including 3′-alkylene phosphonates and chiral phosphonates, phosphinates, phosphoramidates including 3′-amino phosphoramidate and aminoalkylphosphoramidates, thionophosphoramidates, thionoalkylphosphonates, thionoalkylphosphotriesters, and boranophosphates having normal 3′-5′ linkages, 2′-5′ linked analogs of these, and those having inverted polarity wherein the adjacent pairs of nucleoside units are linked 3′-5′ to 5′-3′ or 2′-5′ to 5′-2′.
  • Various salts, mixed salts and free acid forms are also included.
  • modified DNAi oligonucleotide backbones that do not include a phosphorus atom therein have backbones that are formed by short chain alkyl or cycloalkyl internucleoside linkages, mixed heteroatom and alkyl or cycloalkyl internucleoside linkages, or one or more short chain heteroatomic or heterocyclic internucleoside linkages.
  • morpholino linkages formed in part from the sugar portion of a nucleoside
  • siloxane backbones sulfide, sulfoxide and sulfone backbones
  • formacetyl and thioformacetyl backbones methylene formacetyl and thioformacetyl backbones
  • alkene containing backbones sulfamate backbones
  • sulfonate and sulfonamide backbones amide backbones; and others having mixed N, O, S and CH 2 component parts.
  • both the sugar and the internucleoside linkage (i.e., the backbone) of the nucleotide units are replaced with novel groups.
  • the base units are maintained for hybridization with an appropriate nucleic acid target compound.
  • One such oligomeric compound, an oligonucleotide mimetic that has been shown to have excellent hybridization properties is referred to as a peptide nucleic acid (PNA).
  • PNA peptide nucleic acid
  • the sugar-backbone of an oligonucleotide is replaced with an amide containing backbone, in particular an aminoethylglycine backbone.
  • nucleobases are retained and are bound directly or indirectly to aza nitrogen atoms of the amide portion of the backbone.
  • Representative patents that teach the preparation of PNA compounds include, but are not limited to, U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,539,082; 5,714,331; and 5,719,262, each of which is herein incorporated by reference. Further teaching of PNA compounds can be found in Nielsen et al., Science 254:1497 (1991).
  • DMAi oligonucleotides of the invention are oligonucleotides with phosphorothioate backbones and oligonucleosides with heteroatom backbones, and in particular —CH 2 —, —NH—O—CH 2 —, —CH 2 —N(CH 3 )—O—CH 2 — [known as a methylene (methylimino) or MMI backbone], —CH 2 —O—N(CH 3 )—CH 2 —, —CH 2 —N(CH 3 )—N(CH 3 )—CH 2 —, and —O—N(CH 3 )—CH 2 —CH 2 — [wherein the native phosphodiester backbone is represented as —O—P—O—CH 2 -] of the above referenced U.S.
  • Oligonucleotides can also have a morpholino backbone structure of the above-referenced U.S. Pat. No. 5,034,506.
  • the DNAi oligonucleotides have a phosphorothioate backbone having the following general structure.
  • DNAi oligonucleotides of the present invention involves adding additional nucleotides to the 3′ and/or 5′ ends of the DNAi oligonucleotides.
  • the 3′ and 5′ tails can comprise any nucleotide and can be as short as one nucleotide and as long as 20 nucleotides.
  • DNAi oligonucleotides of the present invention involves chemically linking to the oligonucleotide one or more moieties or conjugates that enhance the activity, cellular distribution or cellular uptake of the oligonucleotide.
  • Such moieties include but are not limited to lipid moieties such as a cholesterol moiety, cholic acid, a thioether, (e.g., hexyl-S-tritylthiol), a thiocholesterol, an aliphatic chain, (e.g., dodecandiol or undecyl residues), a phospholipid, (e.g., di-hexadecyl-rac-glycerol or triethylammonium 1,2-di-O-hexadecyl-rac-glycero-3-H-phosphonate), a polyamine or a polyethylene glycol chain or adamantane acetic acid, a palmityl moiety, or an octadecylamine or hexylamino-carbonyl-oxycholesterol moiety.
  • lipid moieties such as a cholesterol moiety, cholic acid, a thioether, (e.
  • DNAi oligonucleotides do not include RNAi and antisense oligonucleotides that base pair only with mRNAs or pre-mRNAs and interfere with RNA processing and/or message translation.
  • the present invention also includes pharmaceutical compositions and formulations that include the DNAi oligonucleotide compounds of the present invention as described below.
  • any of the known methods of oligonucleotide synthesis can be used to prepare the modified DNAi oligomers of the present invention.
  • the nucleotide, dC is replaced by 5-methyl-dC where appropriate, as taught by the present invention.
  • the modified or unmodified DNAi oligonucleotides of the present invention are most conveniently prepared by using any of the commercially available automated nucleic acid synthesizers. They can also be obtained from commercial sources that synthesize custom oligonucleotides pursuant to customer specifications.
  • chemotherapeutic agents including docetaxel and others can be combined with DNAi oligomers before or while sequestering in liposomes.
  • the amphoteric liposome formulations of the mixture of the present invention (1) exhibit low toxicity; (2) can sequester high concentrations of DNAi oligomers e.g., the efficiency of sequestering the DNAi oligonucleotides associated with the amphoteric liposomes is at least about 35%; (3) are stable in the bloodstream, such as when administered systemically, such that the oligonucleotide and/or other agents are stably sequestered in the liposomes until eventual uptake in the target tissue or cells; (4) can be optimized for delivery to animals, such as by adjusting the concentration of sequestered DNAi oligonucleotide to between about 1 to 4 mg/ml (such as about 2 mg/ml) for a lipid concentration of about 10 to 100 mM or less which provides dosing at 10 mg/kg in 200 ⁇ l of injection volume; and (5) can be produced with an average amphoteric liposome size that is smaller than 200 ⁇ m, such as about 100
  • amphoteric liposomes include one or more DNAi oligonucleotides, one or more amphoteric lipids or a mixture of anionic and cationic lipid components with amphoteric properties and one or more neutral lipids.
  • cationic lipids or positive charges on the amphoteric lipids act to bind DNAi oligonucleotides.
  • Anionic lipids, such as CHEMS, or anionic charges on amphoteric lipids and neutral lipids, such as phosphatidylethanolamines allow for the fusogenic properties of the amphoteric liposomes.
  • the amphoteric liposomes can be formed from a lipid phase comprising an amphoteric lipid.
  • the lipid phase can comprise 5 to 30 mole % or 10 to 25 mole % of the amphoteric lipid.
  • the amphoteric liposomes can be formed from a lipid phase comprising a mixture of lipid components with amphoteric properties.
  • the total amount of charged lipids may vary from 5 to 95 mole %, from 20 to 80 mole % or from 30 to 70 mole % of the lipid mixture.
  • the ratio of the percent of cationic lipids to anionic lipids can be between about 3 and 0.5 or between about 2 to 0.5. In some embodiments, the ratio of cationic lipids to anionic lipids is about 2. In other embodiments, the ratio of cationic lipids to anionic lipids is about 1. In other embodiments, the ratio of cationic lipids to anionic lipids is about 0.5.
  • Specific pairs of cationic and anionic lipids include, without limitation, MoChol and CHEMS, DOTAP and CHEMS, MoChol and Cet-P, and MoChol and DMGSucc.
  • Examples of charged lipid pairs further include, without limitation, between about 10 to 60 mole % of MoChol and between about 10 to 30 mole % of CHEMS; between about 5 to 30 mole % of DOTAP and between about 10 to 30 mole % of CHEMS; between about 10 to 40 mole % MoChol and between about 5 to 30 mole % Cet-P; and between about 20 to 60 mole % MoChol and between about 20 to 60 mole % DMGSucc.
  • the amphoteric liposomes also contain neutral lipids, which can be either sterols or phospholipids, and mixtures thereof.
  • the amphoteric liposomes include neutral lipids in an amount between about 5 to 95 mole % of the lipid mixture, between about 20 to 80 mole %, or between 30 and 70 mole %.
  • a number of neutral lipid combinations are useful in forming the amphoteric liposomes, such as POPC and DOPE; and POPC and cholesterol.
  • a combination of the neutral lipids DOPE and cholesterol is not preferred.
  • the mixture of neutral lipids includes 5 to 40 mole % POPC and 20 to 50 mole % DOPE; or 10 to 50 mole % of POPC and 30 to 50 mole % of cholesterol.
  • the ratio of the percentage of charged lipids to neutral lipids can be between about 3 and 0.2. In some embodiments, the ratio of the percentage of charged lipids to neutral lipids is about 2. In other embodiments, the ratio of the percentage of charged lipids to neutral lipids is about 0.5.
  • Examples of specific combinations of charged and neutral lipids for sequestering an DNAi oligomer, such as PNT-100 include POPC, DOPE, MoChol and CHEMS; POPC, DOPE, DMGSucc and MoChol; POPC, DOTAP, CHEMS and cholesterol; and POPC, MoChol, Cet-P and cholesterol.
  • the amphoteric liposome for sequestering a DNAi oligomer, such as SEQ ID NO:1251 includes 3-20 mole % of POPC, 10 to 60 mole % of DOPE, 10 to 60 mole % of MoChol and 10 to 60 mole % of CHEMS.
  • the amphoteric liposome may include POPC/DOPE/MoChol/CHEMS in molar ratios of about 6/24/47/23 and about 15/45/20/20.
  • the amphoteric liposomes include 3-20 mole % of POPC, 10 to 40 mole % of DOPE, 15 to 60 mole % of MoChol and 15 to 60 mole % of DMGSucc.
  • the amphoteric liposome can include POPC/DOPE/DMGSucc/MoChol in molar ratios of about 6/24/23/47 and about 6/24/47/23.
  • the amphoteric liposome includes 10 to 50 mole % of POPC, 20 to 60 mole % of Chol, 10 to 40 mole % of CHEMS and 5 to 20 mole % of DOTAP.
  • the amphoteric liposome can include POPC/Chol/CHEMS/DOTAP in a molar ratio of about 30/40/20/10.
  • the amphoteric liposome includes 10 to 40 mole % of POPC, 20 to 50 mole % of Chol, 5 to 30 mole % of Cet-P and 10 to 40 mole % of MoChol.
  • the amphoteric liposome can include POPC/Chol/Cet-P/MoChol in a molar ratio of about 35/35/10/20.
  • any Amphoter I, II, or III lipid pair of cationic and anionic lipids together with neutral lipids can be used to form liposomes provided that the resulting liposome is amphoteric, exhibits serum stability, has low toxicity, sequesters an ample quantity of the DNAi oligonucleotides, e.g., at an efficiency of about 35%, (about 5%, 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35% or higher) and provides for an adjustment of the DNAi oligonucleotide concentration to at least 2 mg/ml for a lipid concentration of 100 mM or less.
  • DNAi-amphoteric liposomes of the invention can be prepared by standard methods for preparing and sizing liposomes known to those skilled in the art. These include hydration of lipid films and powders, solvent injection and reverse-phase evaporation. Often multilamellar vesicles will form spontaneously when amphiphilic lipids are hydrated, whereas the formation of small unilamellar vesicles usually requires a process involving substantial energy input, such as ultrasonication, high pressure homogenization, injection of lipid solutions in ethanol into a water phase containing the DNAi oligonucleotides to be sequestered and/or extrusion through filters or membranes of defined pore size.
  • a solution of the DNAi oligonucleotide may be contacted with an excipient at a neutral pH, thereby resulting in a passive loading procedure of a certain percentage of the solution.
  • Excipients include substances that can initiate or facilitate loading of DNAi oligonucleotides. Examples of excipients include, without limitation, acid, sodium or ammonium forms of monovalent aniond such as chloride, acetate, lactobionate and formate; divalent anions such as aspartate, succinate and sulfate; and trivalent ions such as citrate and phosphate.
  • Amphoteric liposomes used with the present invention offer the distinct advantage of binding oligonucleotides at or below their isoelectric point, thereby concentrating the active agent at the liposome surface.
  • the advanced loading procedure is described in more detail in PCT International Publication Number WO02/066012.
  • a shearing force is applied to the aqueous dispersion of the DNAi-oligonucleotide lipid mixture.
  • the shearing force can be applied by sonication, using a microfluidizing apparatus such as a homogenizer or French press, injection, freezing and thawing, dialyzing away a detergent solution from lipids, ultrafiltration, extrusion through filters, or other known methods used to prepare liposomes.
  • the size of the liposomes can be controlled using a variety of known techniques, including the duration of shearing force.
  • Unentrapped DNAi oligomers can be removed from the amphoteric liposome dispersion by buffer exchange using dialysis, size exclusion chromatography (e.g., Sephadex G-50 resin), ultrafiltration (100,000-300,000 molecular weight cutoff), or centrifugation.
  • size exclusion chromatography e.g., Sephadex G-50 resin
  • ultrafiltration 100,000-300,000 molecular weight cutoff
  • DNAi oligonucleotide loaded amphoteric liposomes may be manufactured by a machine extrusion. Once the lipids are mixed with the oligonucleotides, they may be extruded using machine extrusion, where the machine is described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,843,942 and US Patent Application No. 2004/0032037.
  • the liposomes are loaded and filtered so that the diameter of the liposome is between 50 ⁇ m and 200 ⁇ m, the encapsulation efficiency of the oligonucleotide is at least about 35% and the resulting liposomes have a DNAi oligonucleotide concentration of at least 2 mg/ml at a lipid concentration of 10 to 100 mM or less.
  • compositions of the invention are useful for treating animals, including humans, or cells to treat cancer, such as by inhibiting or reducing tumor growth.
  • the animal can be a non-human animal, including mice, horses, cats, dogs, or other animals or it can be a human.
  • the mixture is introduced to the animal at a dosage of between 1 mg to 100 mg/kg of body weight.
  • the amphoteric liposomes can be introduced to the animal one or more times per day or continuously.
  • the mixture can be administered to the animal via different routes.
  • Administration can be topical (including ophthalmic and to mucous membranes including vaginal and rectal delivery), pulmonary (e.g., by inhalation or insufflation of powders or aerosols, including by nebulizer; intratracheal, intranasal, epidermal and transdermal), oral or parenteral.
  • Parenteral administration includes intravenous, intraarterial, subcutaneous, intraperitoneal or intramuscular injection or infusion; or intracranial, e.g., intrathecal or intraventricular, administration.
  • Administration can also be via a medical device.
  • the liposomes can be administered to cultured cells derived from various cancers, including pancreatic cancer, colon cancer, breast cancer, bladder cancer, lung cancer, leukemia, prostate cancer, lymphoma, ovarian cancer or melanoma.
  • the liposomes can be used to target DNAi oligonucleotides to selected tissues using several techniques.
  • the procedures involve manipulating the size of the liposomes, their net surface charge as well as the route of administration. More specific manipulations include labeling the liposomes with receptor ligands, including membrane and nuclear receptor ligands or antibodies for specific tissues or cells. Antibodies or ligands can be bound to the surface of the liposomes.
  • DOTAP and Cholesterol are available from Merck, DMG-Succ is available from Chiroblock GmbH, CHEMS can be obtained from Sigma Chemical Company, DPPG, DOPE and POPC are available from Genzyme or Lipoid GMBH and Egg phosphatidylcholine is available from Lipoid GMBH.
  • the lipid composition of the liposomes as well as the methods of preparing them are chosen so that the encapsulation efficiency is about 35% or higher and the liposome size is smaller than 200 ⁇ m, and optimally near 100-120 ⁇ m to maximize tumor penetration.
  • the DNAi oligonucleotide concentration is preferably at least 2 mg/ml at a lipid concentration of 100 mM or less. This allows dosing at 10 mg/kg in 200 ⁇ l of injection volume.
  • Liposomes are produced by a modified lipid film/hydration/extrusion method. Lipids are dissolved in chloroform or chloroform/methanol and dried completely in a rotary evaporator. The lipid films are next hydrated with various amounts of the DNAi oligonucleotides SEQ ID NO:1251 (PNT100) or the complement of PNT-100 (PNT-100R) hydrated in buffer.
  • PNT100 DNAi oligonucleotides SEQ ID NO:1251
  • PNT-100R the complement of PNT-100
  • the resulting suspension is sedimented at 25s using T865 (Sorvall Ultra Pro80) or TLA 100.4 rotors (Beckman Optima-MAX) to remove unsequestered DNAi oligonucleotide and to exchange the buffer with phosphate buffered saline (PBS).
  • T865 Servall Ultra Pro80
  • TLA 100.4 rotors Beckman Optima-MAX
  • the lipid film is hydrated with PBS containing 405 mg of DNAi oligonucleotides for 1 hr at 40° C. at a final lipid concentration of 100 mM.
  • PBS Phosphate Buffered Saline, which has the formula: 10.1 mM Na 2 PO 4 , 1.76 mM KH 2 PO 4 , 137 mM NaCl, 2.68 mM KCl, pH 7.5.
  • the vesicles are prepared by either the passive or advanced loading procedure and extruded using a device for producing lipid vesicle.
  • Liposome properties were measured using a Zetasizer 3000 HAS (Malvern). Liposomes were diluted in appropriate buffer to a final lipid concentration of 0.2-0.6 mM. Size values are recorded as Z average and size distribution was calculated in the Multimodal mode. For Zeta potential measurement, liposomes were also diluted to 0.2-0.6 mM concentration.
  • a ratio of cationic lipid charge to anionic nucleotide charge at low pH (N/P) of 3.3 was found to be the best compromise to produce small particles, high encapsulation efficiency and DNAi oligonucleotide concentration to lipid concentration of at least 2.0 mg/ml of DNAi oligonucleotide at 10 to 100 mM lipid concentration.
  • Liposomes are produced with a modified ethanol injection method. Briefly, 3 volumes of ethanol, containing the lipid mixture D (POPC/DOPE/MoChol/Chems 6:24:47:23) (133 mM, heated to 55° C.) and 8 volumes of 20 mM NaAc/300 mM Sucrose/pH 4, containing 2.71 mg/ml PNT100 (SEQ ID NO:1251) or PNT100-R (SEQ ID NO: 1288) in case of PNT2254 or PNT2254R production, or containing 1.36 mg/ml PNT100 in case of PNT2253 production, were continuously mixed using an injection device as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 6,843,942 and US patent application No.
  • the acidic mixture was shifted to pH 7.5 by an additional continuous mixing step with 32 volumes of 100 mM NaCl/136 mM Phosphate/pH 9.
  • the resulting liposomal suspension was concentrated 10 fold and dialyzed against PBS, pH 7.4 to wash out non encapsulated PNT100 or PNT100-R and excess ethanol.
  • the lipid ratios can be optimized for both stability of the liposomes in serum and minimal leakage of the DNAi oligonucleotides.
  • the above formulations are stable in serum and can exhibit minimal leakage of oligonucleotide.
  • Lymphoma cells WSU-DLCL 2 —Wayne State University Diffuse Large Cell Lymphoma
  • Xenografts were transplanted subcutaneously into C17/SCID mice.
  • mice Seven days after transplantation, mice were injected intravenously with 10 mg/kg of the PNT-100 (SEQ ID NO:1251) formulations and 10 mg/kg of PNT-100R (SEQ ID NO:1288) formulations. The injections were performed daily for 8 days in six mice. The size of the tumors were measured up to 30 days after implantation. All animals survived with no gross toxic pathology.
  • results in FIG. 1 show that PNT-100 slows tumor growth.
  • 340.9 and 340.8 are formulations with PNT-100 and PNT-100R, respectively.
  • the tumor burden was calculated from the size measurements of the tumors.
  • FIG. 3 shows that the tumor burden in mice treated with PNT2253, which is PNT-100 in formulation D, was dramatically less than the tumor burden in mice treated with PNT2253R (PNT-100R in formulation D) or PBS.
  • a dose response experiment was performed in WSU-DLCL2 xenograft bearing mice with PNT-100 in formulation D, with a PNT-100 concentration of 4 mg/ml (PNT2254) and 2 mg/ml (PNT2253).
  • C.B.-17 ACID mice between 6-8 weeks old were supplied by Taconic (Hudson, N.Y.). When the tumors reached approximately 100 mm3 volume, treatment with PNT2253 or PNT2254 was initiated.
  • the animals were checked at least three times weekly for tumor growth by caliper measurements, and the animals were weighed at least three times weekly. Tumor volumes of all treatment groups were analyzed using GraphPadTM statistical software.
  • a maximum tolerated dose of 20 mg/kg/day of PNT2254 and 10 mg/kg/day of PNT2253 was established.
  • FIGS. 4 and 5 Toxicity was achieved at 30 mg/kg/day for PNT2254 and at 20 mg/kg/day for PNT2253, and dosing was stopped after two days due to animal efficacy. A steep dose response was seen with strong anti-tumor efficacy for an extended time period after one dosing cycle.
  • the effect of the two formulations at various dosages on body weight of the mice was determined and is shown in FIG. 6 . For both formulations, a dose of 10 mg/kg/day was efficacious while causing minimal weight loss.
  • T and C are the median times in days for the treatment group (T) and the control group (C) tumors to reach a predetermined weight (750 mg).
  • T ⁇ C is a measure of tumor growth delay and is the difference in the median days to 750 mg between the treated (T) and the control (C) group.
  • Log 10 kill Gross T ⁇ C value in days/3.32 ⁇ T d .
  • T d is the mean tumor doubling time (days) estimated from a log-linear growth plot of the control tumors growing in exponential phase. The higher the Log 10 kill Gross value, the more efficacious the drug, and a value over 2.8 is considered highly efficacious (Corbett, T. H. et al., “Transplantable Syngeneic Rodent Tumors”.
  • PNT2253 treatment resulted in increased toxicity compared to PNT2254.
  • the most efficacious dose was 10 mg/kg/day for both PNT2253 and PNT2254, and the maximum tolerated dose is 20 mg/kg/day for PNT2254 and 10 mg/kg/day of PNT2253.
  • Toxicity of PNT-100 in formula D was explored in Cynomolgus monkeys. Two primates were treated via two hour i.v. infusion with PBS control, 5 mg/kg PNT2254, 25 mg/kg PNT2254, and one primate was treated with 67 mg/kg PNT2254. There was a one week “washout” period between each dosing. Liver enzymes toxicology analysis, complement activation, and gross behavior and physiology measurements were collected before and after each treatment. The purpose of the study was to establish a maximum tolerated dose threshold, and to ensure that there was not a CARPA toxic response to the PNT2254 lipids.
  • CARPA is a toxic response that is historically known to result from a non-classical complement pathway activation toxic response that can cause extreme hypertension and death.
  • the primates tolerated and survived all doses and only a classical complement activation and not non-classical (innate) complement activation was detected.
  • the liver enzyme toxicology analysis demonstrated modest increases in liver enzyme response to PNT2254.

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Genetics & Genomics (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Molecular Biology (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Biotechnology (AREA)
  • Zoology (AREA)
  • Wood Science & Technology (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Epidemiology (AREA)
  • Biochemistry (AREA)
  • Biophysics (AREA)
  • Dispersion Chemistry (AREA)
  • Microbiology (AREA)
  • Plant Pathology (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Oncology (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Medicinal Preparation (AREA)
  • Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)
  • Medicines That Contain Protein Lipid Enzymes And Other Medicines (AREA)

Abstract

The invention relates to compositions and methods to inhibit gene expression. In particular, the invention provides DNAi oligonucleotides sequestered by amphoteric liposomes for the treatment of cancer.

Description

    CLAIM OF PRIORITY
  • This application is a continuation of, and claims priority under U.S.C. §120, to U.S. Non-Provisional patent application Ser. No. 13/751,536 filed on Jan. 28, 2013, which is a divisional of U.S. Non-Provisional patent application Ser. No. 12/085,893, filed on Jun. 2, 2008, which is the U.S. National phase of International patent application No. PCT/US2006/045955 filed on Dec. 1, 2006, which claims priority to U.S. Provisional patent application No. 60/741,192, filed on Dec. 1, 2005 and to U.S. Provisional patent application No. 60/778,473, filed on Mar. 2, 2006, all of which are herein incorporated by reference in their entireties.
  • SEQUENCE LISTING
  • This application incorporates by reference in its entirety the Sequence Listing entitled “Amphoteric_Sequence_ST25.txt” (701 kilobytes) which was last modified on Dec. 12, 2014 and filed electronically herewith.
  • BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
  • The invention relates to compositions and methods of using the same to treat cancer. In particular, the invention relates to DNAi oligonucleotides sequestered with amphoteric liposomes for the treatment of cancer.
  • BACKGROUND
  • Oncogenes have become the central concept in understanding cancer biology and may provide valuable targets for therapeutic drugs. In many types of human tumors, including lymphomas and leukemias, the oncogenes are overexpressed, and may be associated with tumorigenicity (Tsujimoto et al., Science 228:1440-1443 (1985)). For instance, high levels of expression of the human bcl-2 gene have been found in all lymphomas with a t(14; 18) chromosomal translocations including most follicular B cell lymphomas and many large cell non-Hodgkin's lymphomas. High levels of bcl-2 gene expression have also been found in certain leukemias that do not have a t(14; 18) chromosomal translation, including most cases of chronic lymphocytic leukemia acute, many lymphocytic leukemias of the pre-B cell type, neuroblastomas, nasophryngeal carcinomas, and many adenocarcinomas of the prostate, breast and colon. (Reed et al., Cancer Res. 51:6529 [1991]; Yunis et al., New England J. Med. 320:1047; Campos et al., Blood 81:3091-3096 [1993]; McDonnell et al., Cancer Res. 52:6940-6944 [1992); Lu et al., Int. J Cancer 53:29-35 [1993]; Bonner et al., Lab Invest. 68:43A [1993]. Other oncogenes include TGF-α, c-ki-ras, ras, Her-2, and c-myc.
  • The expression of oncogenes may be inhibited by single stranded DNAi oligonucleotides. Nucleic acid therapeutics, however, often lack therapeutic efficacy due to instability in body fluids or inefficient uptake into cells.
  • There is therefore a need for a stable and efficient delivery of such DNAi oligonucleotides in body fluids and cells for the treatment of cancer.
  • SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
  • The invention provides compositions and methods for preparing and using amphoteric liposomes for the delivery of DNAi oligonucleotides for the treatment of cancer. Such amphoteric liposomes may, for example, have an anionic or neutral charge at physiological pH and a cationic charge at an acidic pH of about 4. Advantageously, the compositions of the present invention sequester high amounts of DNAi oligonucleotides, between about 1 to 4 mg/ml (e.g., about 2 mg/ml) at a lipid concentration of about 10 to 100 mM or less; exhibit colloidal and serum stability; enhanced uptake into cells and tumors due to average liposome sizes of less than 200 ηm; and low toxicity relative to liposomes formed with cationic lipids that are used in conventional transfection reagents.
  • In a first aspect, the invention provides a mixture comprising amphoteric liposomes and a DNAi oligonucleotide. In an embodiment of the first aspect, the amphoteric liposomes have an isoelectric point of between 4 and 8. In a further embodiment, the amphoteric liposomes are negatively charged or neutral at pH 7.4 and positively charged at pH 4.
  • In another embodiment of the first aspect, the amphoteric liposomes include amphoteric lipids. In a further embodiment, the amphoteric lipids can be HistChol, HistDG, isoHistSucc DG, Acylcarnosine, HCChol or combinations thereof. In another embodiment, the amphoteric liposomes include a mixture of one or more cationic lipids and one or more anionic lipids. In yet another embodiment, the cationic lipids can be DMTAP, DPTAP, DOTAP, DC-Chol, MoChol or HisChol, or combinations thereof, and the anionic lipids can be CHEMS, DGSucc, Cet-P, DMGSucc, DOGSucc, POGSucc, DPGSucc, DG Succ, DMPS, DPPS, DOPS, POPS, DMPG, DPPG, DOPG, POPG, DMPA, DPPA, DOPA, POPA or combinations thereof.
  • In yet another embodiment, the liposomes also include neutral lipids. In a further embodiment, the neutral lipids include sterols and derivatives thereof. In an even further embodiment, the sterols comprise cholesterol and derivatives thereof. The neutral lipids may also include neutral phospholipids. In one embodiment, the phospholipids include phosphatidylcholines or phosphatidylcholines and phosphoethanolamines. In another embodiment, the phosphatidylcholines are POPC, OPPC, natural or hydrogenated soy bean PC, natural or hydrogenated egg PC, DMPC, DPPC or DOPC and derivatives thereof and the phosphatidylethanolamines are DOPE, DMPE, DPPE or derivatives and combinations thereof. In a further embodiment, the phosphatidylcholine is POPC, OPPC, soy bean PC or egg PC and the phosphatidylethanolamines is DOPE.
  • In an even further embodiment, the lipids of the amphoteric liposomes include DOPE, POPC, CHEMS and MoChol; POPC, Chol, CHEMS and DOTAP; POPC, Chol, Cet-P and MoChol, or POPC, DOPE, MoChol and DMGSucc.
  • In a second aspect, the amphoteric liposomes of the mixture of the invention can be formed from a lipid phase comprising a mixture of lipid components with amphoteric properties, wherein the total amount of charged lipids in the liposome can vary from 5 mole % to 70 mole %, the total amount of neutral lipids may vary from 20 mole % to 70 mole %, and a DNAi oligonucleotide. In an embodiment of the first aspect, the amphoteric liposomes include 3 to 20 mole % of POPC, 10 to 60 mole % of DOPE, 10 to 60 mole % of MoChol and 10 to 50 mole % of CHEMS. In a further embodiment, the liposomes include POPC, DOPE, MoChol and CHEMS in the molar ratios of POPC/DOPE/MoChol/CHEMS of about 6/24/47/23 or 15/45/20/20. In yet another embodiment, the liposomes include 3 to 20 mole % of POPC, 10 to 40 mole % of DOPE, 15 to 60 mole % of MoChol and 15 to 60 mole % of DMGSucc. In a further embodiment, the liposomes include POPC, DOPE, DMGSucc and MoChol in the molar ratios of POPC/DOPE/DMGSucc/MoChol of about 6/24/47/23 or 6/24/23/47. In still another embodiment, the liposomes include 10 to 50 mole % of POPC, 20 to 60 mole % of Chol, 10 to 40 mole % of CHEMS and 5 to 20 mole % of DOTAP. In a further embodiment, the liposomes include POPC, Chol, CHEMS and DOTAP in the molar ratio of POPC/Chol/CHEMS/DOTAP of about 30/40/20/10. In yet another embodiment the liposomes include 10 to 40 mole % of POPC, 20 to 50 mole % of Chol, 5 to 30 mole % of Cet-P and 10 to 40 mole % of MoChol. In a further embodiment, the molar ratio of POPC/Chol/Cet-P/MoChol is about 35/35/10/20.
  • In a third aspect, the DNAi oligonucleotide contained in the amphoteric liposomal mixture comprises a DNAi oligonucleotide that hybridizes to SEQ ID NO:1249 or portions thereof. In another embodiment, the DNAi oligonucleotide can be SEQ ID NO:1250, 1251, 1252, 1253, 1267-1447 or the complement thereof. In yet another embodiment the DNAi oligonucleotide can be SEQ ID NO:1250 or 1251 or the complement thereof.
  • The amphoteric liposomal mixture of this invention may further include an additional DNAi oligonucleotide, e.g., comprising one of SEQ ID NOs: 1250-1253 and 1270-1477, or selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NOs: 2-281, 283-461, 463-935, 937-1080, 1082-1248 and the complements thereof.
  • In another embodiment, the DNAi oligonucleotides contained in the liposomal mixture are between 15 and 35 base pairs in length.
  • In a fourth aspect, the amphoteric liposome-DNAi oligonucleotide mixture includes the DNAi oligonucleotides SEQ ID NO:1250 or 1251 and amphoteric liposomes comprising POPC, DOPE, MoChol and CHEMS in the molar ratio of POPC/DOPE/MoChol/CHEMS of about 6/24/47/23.
  • In a fifth aspect, the amphoteric liposome-DNAi oligonucleotide mixture includes the DNAi oligonucleotide, PNT-100 (SEQ ID NO:1251), and amphoteric liposomes comprising POPC, DOPE, MoChol and CHEMS in the molar ratio of POPC/DOPE/MoChol/CHEMS of about 15/45/20/20.
  • In a sixth aspect, the amphoteric liposomes of the mixture can include a size between 50 and 500 ηm. In one embodiment, the size is between 80 and 300 ηm and in another embodiment the size is between 90 and 200 ηm.
  • In a seventh aspect, the amphoteric liposomes may have an isoelectric point between 4 and 8. In an embodiment of the sixth aspect, the amphoteric liposomes may be negatively charged or neutral at pH 7.4 and positively charged at pH 4.
  • In an eighth aspect, the amphoteric liposomes have a DNAi oligonucleotide concentration of at least about 2 mg/ml at a lipid concentration of 10 to 100 mM or less.
  • In a ninth aspect, the invention provides a method of preparing amphoteric liposomes containing a DNAi oligonucleotide. In one embodiment, the method includes using an active loading procedure and in another, a passive loading procedure. In a further embodiment, the method produces liposomes using manual extrusion, machine extrusion, homogenization, microfluidization or ethanol injection. In yet another embodiment, the method has an encapsulation efficiency of at least 35%.
  • In a tenth aspect, the invention provides a method of introducing the DNAi oligonucleotide-amphoteric liposome mixture to cells or an animal. In one embodiment, the method includes administering the mixture to mammal to treat cancer. The administered mixtures can reduce or stop tumor growth in mammals. In another embodiment, the introduction of the mixture results in a reduction of cell proliferation. In another embodiment, the mixture is administered to a cancer cell, a non-human animal or a human. In a further embodiment, the mixture is introduced to an animal at a dosage of between 0.01 mg to 100 mg per kg of body weight. In yet another embodiment, the mixture is introduced to the animal one or more times per day or continuously. In still another embodiment, the mixture is introduced to the animal via topical, pulmonary or parenteral administration or via a medical device. In an even further embodiment, the mixture administered to the animal or cells further includes a chemotherapy agent, and/or a cell targeting component.
  • BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
  • FIG. 1 shows the effect of SEQ ID NO:1251 sequestered in amphoteric liposomes on the size of tumors from non-Hodgkin's Lymphoma WSU-DLCL2 xenografts in SCID mice.
  • FIG. 2 shows the effect of different lots of SEQ ID NO:1251 sequestered in amphoteric liposomes on the size of tumors from non-Hodgkin's Lymphoma WSU-DLCL2 xenografts in SCID mice.
  • FIG. 3 shows the tumor burden in mice carrying non-Hodgkin's Lymphoma WSU-DLCL2 xenografts treated with SEQ ID NO:1251 sequestered in amphoteric liposomes.
  • FIG. 4 shows a dose response evaluation of two formulations of SEQ ID NO:1251 sequestered in amphoteric liposomes on WSU-DLCL2 xenograft bearing mice.
  • FIG. 5 shows an enlarged view of a dose response evaluation of two formulations of SEQ ID NO:1251 sequestered in amphoteric liposomes on WSU-DLCL2 xenograft bearing mice.
  • FIG. 6 shows a dose response animal body weight evaluation in WSU-DLCL2 xenograft bearing mice treated with two formulations of SEQ ID NO:1251 sequestered in amphoteric liposomes.
  • FIG. 7 shows the effect of SEQ ID NO:1251 sequestered in amphoteric liposomes on the size of tumors from PC-3 xenografts in nude mice.
  • FIG. 8 shows the effect of SEQ ID NO:1251 sequestered in amphoteric liposomes on the growth rate of tumors from PC-3 xenografts in nude mice.
  • Other features and advantages of the invention will be apparent from the following detailed description, and from the claims.
  • BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE SEQUENCES
      • SEQ ID NO:1 c-erb-2 (her-2) upstream region
      • SEQ ID NOs:2-281 c-erb-2 (her-2) DNAi oligonucleotides
      • SEQ ID NO:282 c-ki-ras upstream region
      • SEQ ID NOs:283-461 c-ki-ras DNAi oligonucleotides
      • SEQ ID NO:462 c-Ha-ras upstream region
      • SEQ ID NOs:463-935 c-Ha-ras DNAi oligonucleotides
      • SEQ ID NO:936 c-myc upstream region
      • SEQ ID NOs:937-1080 c-myc DNAi oligonucleotides
      • SEQ ID NO:1081 TGF-α upstream region
      • SEQ ID NOs:1082-1248 TGF-α DNAi oligonucleotides
      • SEQ ID NO:1249 bcl-2 upstream region
      • SEQ ID NO:1250 PNT-100 DNAi oligomer methylated
      • SEQ ID NO:1251 PNT-100 DNAi oligomer
      • SEQ ID NO:1252 DNAi oligomer methylated
      • SEQ ID NO:1253 DNAi oligomer
      • SEQ ID NO:1255 bcl-2 secondary promoter sequence
      • SEQ ID NOs:1256-1266 bcl-2 sequences
      • SEQ ID NOs:1267-1477
      • and 1250-1254 bcl-2 DNAi oligomers
    DETAILED DESCRIPTION I. Definitions
  • To facilitate understanding of the invention, a number of terms are defined below.
  • As used herein, “amphoter” or “amphoteric” character refers to a structure, being a single substance (e.g., a compound) or a mixture of substances (e.g., a mixture of two or more compounds) or a supramolecular complex (e.g., a liposome) comprising charged groups of both anionic and cationic character wherein
      • (i) at least one of the charged groups has a pK between 4 and 8,
      • (ii) the cationic charge prevails at pH 4 and
      • (iii) the anionic charge prevails at pH 8,
        resulting in an isoelectric point of neutral net charge between pH 4 and pH 8. Amphoteric character by that definition is different from zwitterionic character, as zwitterions do not have a pK in the range mentioned above. Consequently, zwitterions are essentially neutrally charged over a range of pH values. Phosphatidylcholine or phosphatidylethanolamines are neutral lipids with zwitterionic character.
  • As used herein, “Amphoter I Lipid Pairs” refers to lipid pairs containing a stable cation and a chargeable anion. Examples include without limitation DDAB/CHEMS, DOTAP/CHEMS and DOTAP/DOPS. In some aspects, the ratio of the percent of cationic lipids to anionic lipids is lower than 1.
  • As used herein, “Amphoter II Lipid Pairs” refers to lipid pairs containing a chargeable cation and a chargeable anion. Examples include without limitation Mo-Chol/CHEMS, DPIM/CHEMS or DPIM/DG-Succ. In some aspects, the ratio of the percent of cationic lipids to anionic lipids is between about 5 and 0.2.
  • As used herein, “Amphoter III Lipid Pairs” refers to lipid pairs containing a chargeable cation and stable anion. Examples include without limitation Mo-Chol/DOPG or Mo-Chol/Chol-SO4. In one embodiment, the ratio of the percent of cationic lipids to anionic lipids is higher than 1.
  • As used herein, “liposome” refers to one or more lipids forming a complex, usually surrounded by an aqueous solution. Liposomes are generally spherical structures comprising lipids fatty acids, lipid bilayer type structures, unilamellar vesicles and amorphous lipid vesicles. Generally, liposomes are completely closed lipid bilayer membranes containing an entrapped aqueous volume. The liposomes may be unilamellar vesicles (possessing a single bilayer membrane), oligolamellar or multilamellar (an onion-like structure characterized by multiple membrane bilayers, each separated from the next by an aqueous layer). Liposomes of the present invention also include a DNAi oligonucleotide as defined below, either bound to the liposomes or sequestered in or on the liposomes. The molecules include, without limitation, DNAi oligonucleotides and/or other agents used to treat diseases such as cancer.
  • As used herein, an “amphoteric liposome” is a liposome with an amphoteric character, as defined above.
  • As used herein, sequestered, sequestering, or sequester refers to encapsulation, incorporation, or association of a DNAi oligonucleotide, with the lipids of a liposome. The DNAi oligonucleotide may be associated with the lipid bilayer or present in the aqueous interior of the liposome or both. It includes encapsulation in the aqueous core of the liposome. It also encompasses situations in which part or all of the DNAi oligonucleotide is located in the aqueous core of the liposome and part outside of the liposome in the aqueous phase of the liposomal suspension, where part of the DNAi oligonucleotide is located in the aqueous core of the liposome and part in the lipid portion of the liposome, or part sticking out of the liposomal exterior, where DNAi oligonucleotides are partially or totally embedded in the lipid portion of the liposome, and includes DNAi oligonucleotides associated with the liposomes, with all or part of the DNAi oligonucleotide associated with the exterior of the liposome.
  • As used herein, a Passive Loading Procedure (PLP) is a process wherein liposomes are charged with DNAi oligonucleotides and/or other molecules where the charges of the lipids are not useful for binding the oligonucleotides.
  • Advanced Loading Procedure (ALP) is an ion exchange process taking advantage of the positive charge of one lipid at acidic pH to bind the DNAi oligonucleotides.
  • As used herein, the term “non-human animals” refers to all non-human animals including, without limitation, vertebrates such as rodents, non-human primates, ovines, bovines, ruminants, lagomorphs, porcines, caprines, equines, canines, felines, ayes, etc.
  • As used herein, the term “nucleic acid molecule”, “nucleic acid sequence” or “polynucleotide” refers to any nucleic acid containing molecule, including without limitation, DNA or RNA. The term polynucleotide(s) generally refers to any polyribonucleotide or polydeoxyribonucleotide, which may be unmodified RNA or DNA or modified RNA or DNA. Thus, for instance, polynucleotides as used herein refers to, among others, single- and double-stranded DNA, DNA that is a mixture of single- and double-stranded regions, single- and double-stranded RNA, and RNA that is mixture of single- and double-stranded regions, hybrid molecules comprising DNA and RNA that may be single-stranded or, more typically, double-stranded or a mixture of single- and double-stranded regions.
  • In addition, “polynucleotide” as used herein refers to triple-stranded regions comprising RNA or DNA or both RNA and DNA. The strands in such regions may be from the same molecule or from different molecules. The regions may include all of one or more of the molecules, but more typically involve only a region of some of the molecules. One of the molecules of a triple-helical region often is an oligonucleotide.
  • The term “polynucleotide,” “nucleic acid molecule” or “nucleic acid sequence” includes DNAs or RNAs that contain one or more modified bases. Thus, DNAs or RNAs with backbones modified for stability or for other reasons are “polynucloeotides,” “nucleic acid molecules” or “nucleic acid sequences” as those terms are intended herein. The terms also encompass sequences that include any of the known base analogs of DNA and RNA.
  • It will be appreciated that a great variety of modifications have been made to DNA and RNA that serve many useful purposes known to those of skill in the art. The term “polynucleotide” as it is employed herein embraces such chemically, enzymatically or metabolically modified forms of polynucleotides, as well as the chemical forms of DNA and RNA characteristic of viruses and cells, including simple and complex cells, among others.
  • By “isolated nucleic acid sequence” is meant a polynucleotide that is not immediately contiguous with either of the coding sequences with which it is immediately contiguous (one on the 5′ end and one on the 3′ end) in the naturally occurring genome of the organism from which it is derived. The term therefore includes, for example, a recombinant DNA which is incorporated into a vector; into an autonomously replicating plasmid or virus; or into the genomic DNA of a prokaryote or eukaryote, or which exists as a separate molecule (e.g., a cDNA) independent of other sequences.
  • The term “gene” refers to a nucleic acid (e.g., DNA) sequence that includes coding sequences necessary for the production of a polypeptide, precursor or RNA (e.g., rRNA, tRNA). The polypeptide can be encoded by a full length coding sequence or by any portion of the coding sequence so long as the desired activity or functional properties (e.g., enzymatic activity, ligand binding, signal transduction, immunogenicity, etc.) of the full-length or fragment is retained.
  • The term also encompasses the coding region of a structural gene and the sequences preceding and following the coding region, (leader and trailer) as well as intervening sequences (introns) between individual coding segments (exons). Sequences located 5′ of the coding region and present on the mRNA are referred to as 5′ non-translated sequences. Sequences located 3′ or downstream of the coding region and present on the mRNA are referred to as 3′ non-translated sequences. The term “gene” encompasses both cDNA and genomic forms of a gene. A genomic form or clone of a gene contains the coding region interrupted with non-coding sequences termed “introns” or “intervening regions” or “intervening sequences.” Introns are segments of a gene that are transcribed into nuclear RNA (hnRNA); introns may contain regulatory elements such as enhancers. Introns are removed or “spliced out” from the nuclear or primary transcript; introns therefore are absent in the messenger RNA (mRNA) transcript. The mRNA functions during translation to specify the sequence or order of amino acids in a nascent polypeptide.
  • As used herein, the term “gene expression” refers to the process of converting genetic information encoded in a gene into RNA (e.g., mRNA, rRNA, tRNA, micro RNA or snRNA) through “transcription” of the gene (i.e., via the enzymatic action of an RNA polymerase), and for protein encoding genes, into protein through “translation” of mRNA. Gene expression can be regulated at many stages in the process. “Up-regulation” or “activation” refers to regulation that increases the production of gene expression products (i.e., RNA or protein), while “down-regulation” or “repression” refers to regulation that decrease production. Molecules (e.g., transcription factors) that are involved in up-regulation or down-regulation are often called “activators” and “repressors,” respectively.
  • In addition to containing introns, genomic forms of a gene may also include sequences located on both the 5′ and 3′ end of the sequences that are present on the RNA transcript. These sequences are referred to as “flanking” sequences or regions (these flanking sequences are located 5′ or 3′ to the non-translated sequences present on the mRNA transcript). The 5′ flanking region (or upstream region) may contain regulatory sequences such as promoters and enhancers that control or influence the transcription of the gene. The 3′ flanking region may contain sequences that direct the termination of transcription, post-transcriptional cleavage and polyadenylation.
  • As used herein, the terms “nucleic acid molecule encoding,” “DNA sequence encoding,” and “DNA encoding” refer to the order or sequence of deoxyribonucleotides along a strand of deoxyribonucleic acid. The order of these deoxyribonucleotides determines the order of amino acids along the polypeptide (protein) chain. The DNA sequence thus codes for the amino acid sequence.
  • The term “oligonucleotide” as used herein is defined as a molecule with two or more deoxyribonucleotides or ribonucleotides, often more than three, and usually more than ten. The exact size of an oligonucleotide will depend on many factors, including the ultimate function or use of the oligonucleotide. Oligonucleotides can be prepared by any suitable method, including, for example, cloning and restriction of appropriate sequences and direct chemical synthesis by a method such as the phosphotriester method of Narang et al., 1979, Meth. Enzymol., 68:90-99; the phosphodiester method of Brown et al., 1979, Method Enzymol., 68:109-151, the diethylphosphoramidite method of Beaucage et al., 1981, Tetrahedron Lett., 22:1859-1862; the triester method of Matteucci et al., 1981, J. Am. Chem. Soc., 103:3185-3191, or automated synthesis methods; and the solid support method of U.S. Pat. No. 4,458,066.
  • As used herein, a “DNAi oligonucleotide” or “DNAi” refers to a single stranded nucleic acid oligonucleotide or derivative thereof, whose sequence is complementary, in part, to a portion of the longest non-transcribed region of a gene in which the oligonucleotide affects indirectly or directly the expression, regulation or production of the same or different gene, wherein the longest non-transcribed region includes any portion of the gene that is not transcribed when the transcriptional start site is the site closest to the translation start site. DNAi does not include RNAi and antisense oligonucleotides that base pair only with mRNAs or pre-mRNAs and interfere with RNA processing and/or message translation.
  • In some embodiments utilizing methylated DNAi oligonucleotides, the nucleotide, dC is replaced by 5-methyl-dC where appropriate, as taught by the present invention.
  • The DNAi oligonucleotides may comprise, without limitation, oligonucleotide mimetics such as are described below. The DNAi oligonucleotide compounds in accordance with this invention may comprise from about 15 to about 35 nucleobases (i.e., from about 15 to about 35 linked bases), although both longer and shorter sequences may find use with the present invention.
  • Oligonucleotides may also include nucleobase (often referred to in the art simply as “base”) modifications or substitutions. As used herein, “unmodified” or “natural” nucleobases include the purine bases adenine (A) and guanine (G), and the pyrimidine bases thymine (T), 16182651.1 cytosine (C) and uracil (U). Modified nucleobases include other synthetic and natural nucleobases.
  • In some embodiments, the DNAi oligonucleotides may hybridizes to the promoter region of a gene. In some embodiments, the hybridization of the DNAi oligonucleotide to the promoter inhibits expression of the gene.
  • By “promoter” is meant a sequence sufficient to direct transcription, including promoter elements that are sufficient to render promoter-dependent gene expression controllable for cell-type specific, tissue-specific, or inducible by external signals or agents; such elements may be located in the 5′ or 3′ regions of the gene. Both constitutive and inducible promoters, are included in the definition (see e.g., Bitter et al., Methods in Enzymology 153:516-544, 1987). For example, when cloning in bacterial systems, inducible promoters such as pL of bacteriophage γ, plac, ptrp, ptac (ptrp-lac hybrid promoter) and the like may be used. When cloning in mammalian cell systems, promoters derived from the genome of mammalian cells (e.g., metallothionein promoter) or from mammalian viruses (e.g., the retrovirus long terminal repeat; the adenovirus late promoter; the vaccinia virus 7.5K promoter) may be used. Promoters produced by recombinant DNA or synthetic techniques are also defined as promoters.
  • As used herein, the “regulatory region” of a gene is any part of a gene that regulates the expression of a gene, including, without limitation, transcriptional and translational regulation. The regions include without limitation the 5′ and 3′ regions of genes, binding sites for regulatory factors, including without limitation transcription factor binding sites. The regions also include regions that are as long as 20,000 or more base pairs upstream or downstream of translational start sites, so long as the region is involved in any way in the regulation of the expression of the gene. The region may be as short as 20 base pairs or as long as thousands of base pairs.
  • By “transformation” or “transfection” is meant a permanent or transient genetic change induced in a cell following incorporation of new DNA (i.e., DNA exogenous to the cell). Where the cell is a mammalian cell, a permanent genetic change is generally achieved by introduction of the DNA into the genome of the cell.
  • By “transformed cell” or “host cell” is meant a cell (e.g., prokaryotic or eukaryotic) into which (or into an ancestor of which) has been introduced, by means of recombinant DNA techniques, a DNA molecule encoding a polypeptide of the invention (i.e., a Methuselah polypeptide), or fragment thereof.
  • Transformation of a host cell with recombinant DNA may be carried out by conventional techniques as are well known to those skilled in the art. Where the host is prokaryotic, such as E. coli, competent cells which are capable of DNA uptake can be prepared from cells harvested after exponential growth phase and subsequently treated by the CaCl2 method by procedures well known in the art. Alternatively, MgCl2 or RbCl can be used. Transformation can also be performed after forming a protoplast of the host cell or by electroporation.
  • As used herein, the terms “complementary” or “complementarity” are used in reference to polynucleotides (i.e., a sequence of nucleotides) related by the base-pairing rules. For example, for the sequence “A-G-T,” is complementary to the sequence “T-C-A.” Complementarity may be “partial,” in which only some of the nucleic acids' bases are matched according to the base pairing rules. Or, there may be “complete” or “total” complementarity between the nucleic acids. The degree of complementarity between nucleic acid strands has significant effects on the efficiency and strength of hybridization between nucleic acid strands.
  • As used herein, the term “completely complementary,” for example when used in reference to a DNAi oligonucleotide of the present invention refers to an oligonucleotide where all of the nucleotides are complementary to a target sequence (e.g., a gene).
  • As used herein, the term “partially complementary,” refers to a sequence where at least one nucleotide is not complementary to the target sequence. Preferred partially complementary sequences are those that can still hybridize to the target sequence under physiological conditions. The term “partially complementary” refers to sequences that have regions of one or more non-complementary nucleotides both internal to the sequence or at either end. Sequences with mismatches at the ends may still hybridize to the target sequence.
  • The term “homology” refers to a degree of complementarity. There may be partial homology or complete homology (i.e., identity). A partially complementary sequence is a nucleic acid molecule that at least partially inhibits a completely complementary nucleic acid molecule from hybridizing to a target nucleic acid is “substantially homologous.” The inhibition of hybridization of the completely complementary sequence to the target sequence may be examined using a hybridization assay (Southern or northern blot, solution hybridization and the like) under conditions of low stringency. A substantially homologous sequence or probe will compete for and inhibit the binding (i.e., the hybridization) of a completely homologous nucleic acid molecule to a target under conditions of low stringency. Likewise, a substantially complementary sequence or probe will compete for and inhibit the binding (i.e., the hybridization) of a completely complementary nucleic acid molecule to a target under conditions of low stringency. This is not to say that conditions of low stringency are such that non-specific binding is permitted; low stringency conditions require that the binding of two sequences to one another be a specific (i.e., selective) interaction. The absence of non-specific binding may be tested by the use of a second target that is substantially non-complementary (e.g., less than about 30% identity); in the absence of non-specific binding the probe will not hybridize to the second non-complementary target.
  • When used in reference to a double-stranded nucleic acid sequence such as a cDNA or genomic clone, the term “substantially homologous” refers to any probe that can hybridize to either or both strands of the double-stranded nucleic acid sequence under conditions of low stringency as described above.
  • When used in reference to a single-stranded nucleic acid sequence, the term “substantially homologous” refers to any probe that can hybridize (i.e., it is the complement of) the single-stranded nucleic acid sequence under conditions of low stringency as described above.
  • As used herein, the term “hybridization” is used in reference to the pairing of complementary nucleic acids. Hybridization and the strength of hybridization (i.e., the strength of the association between the nucleic acids) is impacted by such factors as the degree of complementary between the nucleic acids, stringency of the conditions involved, the Tm of the formed hybrid, and the G:C ratio within the nucleic acids. A single molecule that contains pairing of complementary nucleic acids within its structure is said to be “self-hybridized.”
  • As used herein, the term “Tm” is used in reference to the “melting temperature.” The melting temperature is the temperature at which a population of double-stranded nucleic acid molecules becomes half dissociated into single strands. The equation for calculating the Tm of nucleic acids is well known in the art. As indicated by standard references, a simple estimate of the Tm value may be calculated by the equation Tm=81.5+0.41(% G+C), when a nucleic acid is in aqueous solution at 1 M NaCl (See e.g., Anderson and Young, Quantitative Filter Hybridization, in Nucleic Acid Hybridization (1985)). Other references include more sophisticated computations that take structural as well as sequence characteristics into account for the calculation of Tm.
  • Inhibition of hybridization of the completely complementary sequence to the target sequence may be examined using a hybridization assay (Southern or northern blot, solution hybridization and the like) under conditions of low stringency. A substantially homologous sequence or probe will compete for and inhibit the binding (i.e., the hybridization) of a completely homologous nucleic acid molecule to a target under conditions of low stringency. This is not to say that conditions of low stringency are such that non-specific binding is permitted; low stringency conditions require that the binding of two sequences to one another be a specific (i.e., selective) interaction. The absence of non-specific binding may be tested by the use of a second target that is substantially non-complementary (e.g., less than about 30% identity); in the absence of non-specific binding the probe will not hybridize to the second non-complementary target.
  • When used in reference to a double-stranded nucleic acid sequence such as a cDNA or genomic clone, the term “substantially homologous” refers to any probe that can hybridize to either or both strands of the double-stranded nucleic acid sequence under conditions of low stringency as described above.
  • As used herein the term “stringency” is used in reference to the conditions of temperature, ionic strength and the presence of other compounds such as organic solvents, under which nucleic acid hybridizations are conducted. Under “low stringency conditions” a nucleic acid sequence of interest will hybridize to its exact complement, sequences with single base mismatches, closely related sequences (e.g., sequences with 90% or greater homology), and sequences having only partial homology (e.g., sequences with 50-90% homology). Under “medium stringency conditions,” a nucleic acid sequence of interest will hybridize only to its exact complement, sequences with single base mismatches, and closely relation sequences (e.g., 90% or greater homology). Under “high stringency conditions,” a nucleic acid sequence of interest will hybridize only to its exact complement, and (depending on conditions such a temperature) sequences with single base mismatches. In other words, under conditions of high stringency the temperature can be raised so as to exclude hybridization to sequences with single base mismatches.
  • As used herein, the term “physiological conditions” refers to specific stringency conditions that approximate or are conditions inside an animal (e.g., a human). Exemplary physiological conditions for use in vitro include, but are not limited to, 37° C., 95% air, 5% CO2, commercial medium for culture of mammalian cells (e.g., DMEM media available from Gibco, Md.), 5-10% serum (e.g., calf serum or horse serum), additional buffers, and optionally hormone (e.g., insulin and epidermal growth factor).
  • The term “isolated” means altered “by the hand of man” from its natural state; i.e., if it occurs in nature, it has been changed or removed from its original environment or both. For example, when used in relation to a nucleic acid, as in “an isolated nucleotide” or “isolated polynucleotide” refers to a nucleic acid sequence that is identified and separated from at least one component or contaminant with which it is ordinarily associated in its natural source. Isolated nucleic acid as such present in a form or setting that is different from that in which it is found in nature. In contrast, non-isolated nucleic acids are nucleic acids such as DNA and RNA found in the state they exist in nature. For example, a given DNA sequence (e.g., a gene) is found on the host cell chromosome in proximity to neighboring genes; RNA sequences, such as a specific mRNA sequence encoding a specific protein, are found in the cell as a mixture with numerous other mRNAs that encode a multitude of proteins. However, isolated nucleic acid encoding a given protein includes, by way of example, such nucleic acid in cells ordinarily expressing the given protein where the nucleic acid is in a chromosomal location different from that of natural cells, or is otherwise flanked by a different nucleic acid sequence than that found in nature. The isolated nucleic acid, oligonucleotide or polynucleotide may be present in single-stranded or double-stranded form. When an isolated nucleic acid, oligonucleotide or polynucleotide is to be used to express a protein, the oligonucleotide or polynucleotide will contain at a minimum the sense or coding strand (i.e., the oligonucleotide or polynucleotide may be single-stranded), but may contain both the sense and anti-sense strands (i.e., the oligonucleotide or polynucleotide may be double-stranded).
  • As used herein, the term “purified” or “to purify” refers to removing components (e.g., contaminants) from a sample. For example, recombinant polypeptides are expressed in bacterial host cells and the polypeptides are purified by removing host cell proteins; the percent of recombinant polypeptides is thereby increased in the sample.
  • As used herein, the term “cell culture” refers to any in vitro culture of cells. Included within this term are continuous cell lines (e.g., with an immortal phenotype), primary cell cultures, transformed cell lines, finite cell lines (e.g., non-transformed cells), and any other cell population maintained in vitro.
  • As used, the term “eukaryote” refers to organisms distinguishable from “prokaryotes.” It is intended that the term encompass all organisms with cells that exhibit the usual characteristics of eukaryotes, such as the presence of a true nucleus bounded by a nuclear membrane, within which lie the chromosomes, the presence of membrane-bound organelles and other characteristics commonly observed in eukaryotic organisms. Thus, the term includes, but is not limited to such organisms as fungi, protozoa and animals (e.g., humans).
  • As used herein, the term “in vitro” refers to an artificial environment and to processes or reactions that occur within an artificial environment. In vitro environments can consist of, but are not limited to, test tubes and cell culture. The term “in vivo” refers to the natural environment (e.g., an animal or a cell) and to processes or reaction that occur within a natural environment.
  • As used herein, the term “under conditions such that expression of a gene is inhibited” refers to conditions where a DNAi oligonucleotide of the present invention hybridizes to a gene (e.g., the promoter region of the gene) and inhibits transcription of the gene by at least 10%, at least 25%, at least 50% or at least 90% relative to the level of transcription in the absence of the oligonucleotide.
  • As used herein, the term “under conditions such that growth of a cell is reduced” refers to conditions where a DNAi oligonucleotide of the present invention, when administered to a cell (e.g., a cancer) reduces the rate of growth of the cell by at least 10%, at least 25%, at least 50% or at least 90% relative to the rate of growth of the cell in the absence of the oligonucleotide.
  • The terms “test compound” and “candidate compound” refer to any chemical entity, pharmaceutical, drug, biologic and the like that is a candidate for use to treat or prevent a disease, illness, sickness, or disorder of bodily function (e.g., cancer). Test compounds include both known and potential therapeutic compounds. A test compound can be determined to be therapeutic by screening using the screening methods of the present invention. In some embodiments of the present invention, the mixture includes a DNAi oligonucleotide a test compound such as an antisense compound or a chemotherapy agent.
  • As used herein, the term “chemotherapeutic agents” refers to compounds that can be useful in the treatment of disease (e.g., cancer). Exemplary chemotherapeutic agents affective against cancer include, without limitation, daunorubicin, dactinomycin, doxorubicin, bleomycin, mitomycin, nitrogen mustard, chlorambucil, melphalan, cyclophosphamide, 6-mercaptopurine, 6-thioguanine, cytarabine (CA), 5-fluorouracil (5-FU), floxuridine (5-FUdR), methotrexate (MTX), colchicine, taxotere, vincristine, vinblastine, etoposide, teniposide, cisplatin and diethylstilbestrol (DES).
  • For purposes of this invention, the chemical elements are identified in accordance with the Periodic Table of the Elements, CAS version, Handbook of Chemistry and Physics, 75th Ed. Additionally, general principles of organic chemistry are described in “Organic Chemistry”, Thomas Sorrell, University Science Books, Sausalito: 1999, and “March's Advanced Organic Chemistry”, 5th Ed., Ed.: Smith, M. B. and March, J., John Wiley & Sons, New York: 2001.
  • As used herein the term “aliphatic” encompasses the terms alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, each of which being optionally substituted as set forth below.
  • As used herein, an “alkyl” group refers to a saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group containing 1-8 (e.g., 1-6 or 1-4) carbon atoms. An alkyl group can be straight or branched. Examples of alkyl groups include, but are not limited to, methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, n-pentyl, n-heptyl or 2-ethylhexyl. An alkyl group can be substituted (i.e., optionally substituted) with one or more substituents such as halo, cycloaliphatic, heterocycloaliphatic, aryl, heteroaryl, alkoxy, aroyl, heteroaroyl, cycloaliphaticcarbonyl, (heterocycloaliphatic)carbonyl, nitro, cyano, amino, amido, acyl, sulfonyl, sulfinyl, sulfanyl, sulfoxy, urea, thiourea, sulfamoyl, sulfamide, oxo, carboxy, carbamoyl, cycloaliphaticoxy, heterocycloaliphaticoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, aralkyloxy, heteroarylalkoxy, or hydroxy. Without limitation, some examples of substituted alkyls include carboxyalkyl (such as HOOC-alkyl, alkoxycarbonylalkyl and alkylcarbonyloxyalkyl), cyanoalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, alkoxyalkyl, acylalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, aralkyl, (alkoxyaryl)alkyl, (sulfonylamino)alkyl (such as (alkylsulfonylamino)alkyl), aminoalkyl, amidoalkyl, (cycloaliphatic)alkyl, cyanoalkyl, or haloalkyl.
  • As used herein, an “alkenyl” group refers to an aliphatic carbon group that contains 2-8 (e.g., 2-6 or 2-4) carbon atoms and at least one double bond. Like an alkyl group, an alkenyl group can be straight or branched. Examples of an alkenyl group include, but are not limited to, allyl, isoprenyl, 2-butenyl and 2-hexenyl. An alkenyl group can be optionally substituted with one or more substituents such as halo, cycloaliphatic, heterocycloaliphatic, aryl, heteroaryl, alkoxy, aroyl, heteroaroyl, (cycloaliphatic)carbonyl, (heterocycloaliphatic)carbonyl, nitro, cyano, amino, amido, acyl, sulfonyl, sulfinyl, sulfanyl, sulfoxy, urea, thiourea, sulfamoyl, sulfamide, oxo, carboxy, carbamoyl, (cycloaliphatic)oxy, (heterocycloaliphatic)oxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, aralkyloxy, (heteroaryl)alkoxy, or hydroxy.
  • As used herein, an “alkynyl” group refers to an aliphatic carbon group that contains 2-8 (e.g., 2-6 or 2-4) carbon atoms and has at least one triple bond. An alkynyl group can be straight or branched. Examples of an alkynyl group include, but are not limited to, propargyl and butynyl. An alkynyl group can be optionally substituted with one or more substituents such as halo, cycloaliphatic, heterocycloaliphatic, aryl, heteroaryl, alkoxy, aroyl, heteroaroyl, (cycloaliphatic)carbonyl, (heterocycloaliphatic)carbonyl, nitro, cyano, amino, amido, acyl, sulfonyl, sulfinyl, sulfanyl, sulfoxy, urea, thiourea, sulfamoyl, sulfamide, oxo, carboxy, carbamoyl, (cycloaliphatic)oxy, (heterocycloaliphatic)oxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, aralkyloxy, (heteroaryl)alkoxy, or hydroxy.
  • As used herein, an “amido” encompasses both “aminocarbonyl” and “carbonylamino”. These terms when used alone or in connection with another group refers to an amido group such as N(RX)2—C(O)— or RYC(O)—N(RX)2— when used terminally and —C(O)—N(RX)— or —N(RX)—C(O)— when used internally, wherein RX and RY are defined below. Examples of amido groups include alkylamido (such as alkylcarbonylamino and alkylcarbonylamino), (heterocycloaliphatic)amido, (heteroaralkyl)amido, (heteroaryl)amido, (heterocycloalkyl)alkylamido, arylamido, aralkylamido, (cycloalkyl)alkylamido, and cycloalkylamido.
  • As used herein, an “amino” group refers to —NRXRY wherein each of RX and RY is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloaliphatic, (cycloaliphatic)aliphatic, aryl, araliphatic, heterocycloaliphatic, (heterocycloaliphatic)aliphatic, heteroaryl, carboxy, sulfanyl, sulfinyl, sulfonyl, (aliphatic)carbonyl, (cycloaliphatic)carbonyl, ((cycloaliphatic)aliphatic)carbonyl, arylcarbonyl, (araliphatic)carbonyl, (heterocycloaliphatic)carbonyl, ((heterocycloaliphatic)aliphatic)carbonyl, (heteroaryl)carbonyl, or (heteroaraliphatic)carbonyl, each of which being defined herein and being optionally substituted. Examples of amino groups include alkylamino, dialkylamino, and arylamino.
  • When the term “amino” is not the terminal group (e.g., alkylcarbonylamino), it is represented by —NRX—. RX has the same meaning as defined above.
  • As used herein, an “aryl” group used alone or as part of a larger moiety as in “aralkyl”, “aralkoxy”, or “aryloxyalkyl” refers to monocyclic (e.g., phenyl); bicyclic (e.g., indenyl, naphthalenyl, tetrahydronaphthyl, tetrahydroindenyl); and tricyclic (e.g., fluorenyl tetrahydrofluorenyl, or tetrahydroanthracenyl, anthracenyl). The bicyclic and tricyclic groups include benzofused 2-3 membered carbocyclic rings. For example, a benzofused group includes phenyl fused with two or more C4-8 carbocyclic moieties. An aryl is optionally substituted with one or more substituents including aliphatic [e.g., alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl]; cycloaliphatic; (cycloaliphatic)aliphatic; heterocycloaliphatic; (heterocycloaliphatic)aliphatic; aryl; heteroaryl; alkoxy; (cycloaliphatic)oxy; (heterocycloaliphatic)oxy; aryloxy; heteroaryloxy; (araliphatic)oxy; (heteroaraliphatic)oxy; aroyl; heteroaroyl; amino; oxo (on a non-aromatic carbocyclic ring of a benzofused bicyclic or tricyclic aryl); nitro; carboxy; amido; acyl [e.g., aliphaticcarbonyl; (cycloaliphatic)carbonyl; ((cycloaliphatic)aliphatic)carbonyl; (araliphatic)carbonyl; (heterocycloaliphatic)carbonyl; ((heterocycloaliphatic) aliphatic)carbonyl; and (heteroaraliphatic)carbonyl]; sulfonyl [e.g., aliphaticsulfonyl and aminosulfonyl]; sulfinyl [e.g., aliphaticsulfinyl]; sulfanyl [e.g., aliphaticsulfanyl]; nitro; cyano; halo; hydroxyl; mercapto; sulfoxy; urea; thiourea; sulfamoyl; sulfamide; and carbamoyl. Alternatively, an aryl can be unsubstituted.
  • Non-limiting examples of substituted aryls include haloaryl [e.g., mono-, di (such as p,m-dihaloaryl), and (trihalo)aryl]; (carboxy)aryl [e.g., (alkoxycarbonyl)aryl, ((aralkyl)carbonyloxy)aryl, and (alkoxycarbonyl)aryl]; (amido)aryl [e.g., (aminocarbonyl)aryl, (((alkylamino)alkyl)aminocarbonyl)aryl, (alkylcarbonyl)aminoaryl, (arylaminocarbonyl)aryl, and (((heteroaryl)amino)carbonyl)aryl]; aminoaryl [e.g., ((alkylsulfonyl)amino)aryl and ((dialkyl)amino)aryl]; (cyanoalkyl)aryl; (alkoxy)aryl; (sulfamoyl)aryl [e.g., (aminosulfonyl)aryl]; (alkylsulfonyl)aryl; (cyano)aryl; (hydroxyalkyl)aryl; ((alkoxy)alkyl)aryl; (hydroxyl)aryl, ((carboxy)alkyl)aryl; (((dialkyl)amino)alkyl)aryl; (nitroalkyl)aryl; (((alkylsulfonyl)amino)alkyl)aryl; ((heterocycloaliphatic)carbonyl)aryl; ((alkylsulfonyl)alkyl)aryl; (cyanoalkyl)aryl; (hydroxyalkyl)aryl; (alkylcarbonyl)aryl; alkylaryl; (trihaloalkyl)aryl; p-amino-m-alkoxycarbonylaryl; p-amino-m-cyanoaryl; p-halo-m-aminoaryl; and (m-(heterocycloaliphatic)-o-(alkyl))aryl.
  • As used herein, an “araliphatic” such as an “aralkyl” group refers to an aliphatic group (e.g., a C1-4 alkyl group) that is substituted with an aryl group. “Aliphatic,” “alkyl,” and “aryl” are defined herein. An example of an araliphatic such as an aralkyl group is benzyl.
  • As used herein, a “bicyclic ring system” includes 8-12 (e.g., 9, 10, or 11) membered structures that form two rings, wherein the two rings have at least one atom in common (e.g., 2 atoms in common). Bicyclic ring systems include bicycloaliphatics (e.g., bicycloalkyl or bicycloalkenyl), bicycloheteroaliphatics, bicyclic aryls, and bicyclic heteroaryls.
  • As used herein, a “cycloaliphatic” group encompasses a “cycloalkyl” group and a “cycloalkenyl” group, each of which being optionally substituted as set forth below.
  • As used herein, a “cycloalkyl” group refers to a saturated carbocyclic mono- or bicyclic (fused or bridged) ring of 3-10 (e.g., 5-10) carbon atoms. Examples of cycloalkyl groups include cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl, adamantyl, norbornyl, cubyl, octahydro-indenyl, decahydro-naphthyl, bicyclo[3.2.1]octyl, bicyclo[2.2.2]octyl, bicyclo[3.3.1]nonyl, bicyclo[3.3.2.]decyl, bicyclo[2.2.2]octyl, adamantyl, azacycloalkyl, or ((aminocarbonyl)cycloalkyl)cycloalkyl. A “cycloalkenyl” group, as used herein, refers to a non-aromatic carbocyclic ring of 3-10 (e.g., 4-8) carbon atoms having one or more double bonds. Examples of cycloalkenyl groups include cyclopentenyl, 1,4-cyclohexa-di-enyl, cycloheptenyl, cyclooctenyl, hexahydro-indenyl, octahydro-naphthyl, cyclohexenyl, cyclopentenyl, bicyclo[2.2.2]octenyl, and bicyclo[3.3.1]nonenyl.
  • A cycloalkyl or cycloalkenyl group can be optionally substituted with one or more substituents such as aliphatic [e.g., alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl], cycloaliphatic, (cycloaliphatic) aliphatic, heterocycloaliphatic, (heterocycloaliphatic) aliphatic, aryl, heteroaryl, alkoxy, (cycloaliphatic)oxy, (heterocycloaliphatic)oxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, (araliphatic)oxy, (heteroaraliphatic)oxy, aroyl, heteroaroyl, amino, amido [e.g., (aliphatic)carbonylamino, (cycloaliphatic)carbonylamino, ((cycloaliphatic)aliphatic)carbonylamino, (aryl)carbonylamino, (araliphatic)carbonylamino, (heterocycloaliphatic)carbonylamino, ((heterocycloaliphatic)aliphatic)carbonylamino, (heteroaryl)carbonylamino, and (heteroaraliphatic)carbonylamino], nitro, carboxy [e.g., HOOC—, alkoxycarbonyl, and alkylcarbonyloxy], acyl [e.g., (cycloaliphatic)carbonyl, ((cycloaliphatic) aliphatic)carbonyl, (araliphatic)carbonyl, (heterocycloaliphatic)carbonyl, ((heterocycloaliphatic)aliphatic)carbonyl, and (heteroaraliphatic)carbonyl], nitro, cyano, halo, hydroxy, mercapto, sulfonyl [e.g., alkylsulfonyl and arylsulfonyl], sulfinyl [e.g., alkylsulfinyl], sulfanyl [e.g., alkylsulfanyl], sulfoxy, urea, thiourea, sulfamoyl, sulfamide, oxo, or carbamoyl.
  • As used herein, “cyclic moiety” includes cycloaliphatic, heterocycloaliphatic, aryl, or heteroaryl, each of which has been defined previously.
  • As used herein, the term “heterocycloaliphatic” encompasses a heterocycloalkyl group and a heterocycloalkenyl group, each of which being optionally substituted as set forth below.
  • As used herein, a “heterocycloalkyl” group refers to a 3-10 membered mono- or bicylic (fused or bridged) (e.g., 5- to 10-membered mono- or bicyclic) saturated ring structure, in which one or more of the ring atoms is a heteroatom (e.g., N, O, S, or combinations thereof). Examples of a heterocycloalkyl group include piperidyl, piperazyl, tetrahydropyranyl, tetrahydrofuryl, 1,4-dioxolanyl, 1,4-dithianyl, 1,3-dioxolanyl, oxazolidyl, isoxazolidyl, morpholinyl, thiomorpholyl, octahydro-benzofuryl, octahydro-chromenyl, octahydro-thiochromenyl, octahydro-indolyl, octahydro-pyrindinyl, decahydro-quinolinyl, octahydro-benzo[b]thiopheneyl, 2-oxa-bicyclo[2.2.2]octyl, 1-aza-bicyclo[2.2.2]octyl, 3-aza-bicyclo[3.2.1]octyl, and 2,6-dioxa-tricyclo[3.3.1.03,7]nonyl. A monocyclic heterocycloalkyl group can be fused with a phenyl moiety such as tetrahydroisoquinoline. A “heterocycloalkenyl” group, as used herein, refers to a mono- or bicylic (e.g., 5- to 10-membered mono- or bicyclic) non-aromatic ring structure having one or more double bonds, and wherein one or more of the ring atoms is a heteroatom (e.g., N, O, or S). Monocyclic and bicycloheteroaliphatics are numbered according to standard chemical nomenclature.
  • A heterocycloalkyl or heterocycloalkenyl group can be optionally substituted with one or more substituents such as aliphatic [e.g., alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl], cycloaliphatic, (cycloaliphatic) aliphatic, heterocycloaliphatic, (heterocycloaliphatic) aliphatic, aryl, heteroaryl, alkoxy, (cycloaliphatic)oxy, (heterocycloaliphatic)oxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, (araliphatic)oxy, (heteroaraliphatic)oxy, aroyl, heteroaroyl, amino, amido [e.g., (aliphatic)carbonylamino, (cycloaliphatic)carbonylamino, ((cycloaliphatic) aliphatic)carbonylamino, (aryl)carbonylamino, (araliphatic)carbonylamino, (heterocycloaliphatic)carbonylamino, ((heterocycloaliphatic) aliphatic)carbonylamino, (heteroaryl)carbonylamino, and (heteroaraliphatic)carbonylamino], nitro, carboxy [e.g., HOOC—, alkoxycarbonyl, and alkylcarbonyloxy], acyl [e.g., (cycloaliphatic)carbonyl, ((cycloaliphatic) aliphatic)carbonyl, (araliphatic)carbonyl, (heterocycloaliphatic)carbonyl, ((heterocycloaliphatic)aliphatic)carbonyl, and (heteroaraliphatic)carbonyl], nitro, cyano, halo, hydroxy, mercapto, sulfonyl [e.g., alkylsulfonyl and arylsulfonyl], sulfinyl [e.g., alkylsulfinyl], sulfanyl [e.g., alkylsulfanyl], sulfoxy, urea, thiourea, sulfamoyl, sulfamide, oxo, or carbamoyl.
  • A “heteroaryl” group, as used herein, refers to a monocyclic, bicyclic, or tricyclic ring structure having 4 to 15 ring atoms wherein one or more of the ring atoms is a heteroatom (e.g., N, O, S, or combinations thereof) and wherein one ore more rings of the bicyclic or tricyclic ring structure is aromatic. A heteroaryl group includes a benzofused ring system having 2 to 3 rings. For example, a benzofused group includes benzo fused with one or two 4 to 8 membered heterocycloaliphatic moieties (e.g., indolizyl, indolyl, isoindolyl, 3H-indolyl, indolinyl, benzo[b]furyl, benzo[b]thiophenyl, quinolinyl, or isoquinolinyl). Some examples of heteroaryl are azetidinyl, pyridyl, 1H-indazolyl, furyl, pyrrolyl, thienyl, thiazolyl, oxazolyl, imidazolyl, tetrazolyl, benzofuryl, isoquinolinyl, benzthiazolyl, xanthene, thioxanthene, phenothiazine, dihydroindole, benzo[1,3]dioxole, benzo[b]furyl, benzo[b]thiophenyl, indazolyl, benzimidazolyl, benzthiazolyl, puryl, cinnolyl, quinolyl, quinazolyl, cinnolyl, phthalazyl, quinazolyl, quinoxalyl, isoquinolyl, 4H-quinolizyl, benzo-1,2,5-thiadiazolyl, or 1,8-naphthyridyl.
  • Without limitation, monocyclic heteroaryls include furyl, thiophenyl, 2H-pyrrolyl, pyrrolyl, oxazolyl, thazolyl, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl, isoxazolyl, isothiazolyl, 1,3,4-thiadiazolyl, 2H-pyranyl, 4-H-pranyl, pyridyl, pyridazyl, pyrimidyl, pyrazolyl, pyrazyl, or 1,3,5-triazyl. Monocyclic heteroaryls are numbered according to standard chemical nomenclature.
  • Without limitation, bicyclic heteroaryls include indolizyl, indolyl, isoindolyl, 3H-indolyl, indolinyl, benzo[b]furyl, benzo[b]thiophenyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, indazolyl, benzimidazyl, benzthiazolyl, purinyl, 4H-quinolizyl, quinolyl, isoquinolyl, cinnolyl, phthalazyl, quinazolyl, quinoxalyl, 1,8-naphthpidyl, or pteridyl. Bicyclic heteroaryls are numbered according to standard chemical nomenclature.
  • A heteroaryl is optionally substituted with one or more substituents such as aliphatic [e.g., alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl]; cycloaliphatic; (cycloaliphatic)aliphatic; heterocycloaliphatic; (heterocycloaliphatic)aliphatic; aryl; heteroaryl; alkoxy; (cycloaliphatic)oxy; (heterocycloaliphatic)oxy; aryloxy; heteroaryloxy; (araliphatic)oxy; (heteroaraliphatic)oxy; aroyl; heteroaroyl; amino; oxo (on a non-aromatic carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring of a bicyclic or tricyclic heteroaryl); nitro; carboxy; amido; acyl [e.g., aliphaticcarbonyl; (cycloaliphatic)carbonyl; ((cycloaliphatic)aliphatic)carbonyl; (araliphatic)carbonyl; (heterocycloaliphatic)carbonyl; ((heterocycloaliphatic) aliphatic)carbonyl; and (heteroaraliphatic)carbonyl]; sulfonyl [e.g., aliphaticsulfonyl and aminosulfonyl]; sulfinyl [e.g., aliphaticsulfinyl]; sulfanyl [e.g., aliphaticsulfanyl]; nitro; cyano; halo; hydroxyl; mercapto; sulfoxy; urea; thiourea; sulfamoyl; sulfamide; or carbamoyl. Alternatively, a heteroaryl can be unsubstituted.
  • Non-limiting examples of substituted heteroaryls include (halo)heteroaryl [e.g., mono- and di-(halo)heteroaryl]; (carboxy)heteroaryl [e.g., (alkoxycarbonyl)heteroaryl]; cyanoheteroaryl; aminoheteroaryl [e.g., ((alkylsulfonyl)amino)heteroaryl and ((dialkyl)amino)heteroaryl]; (amido)heteroaryl [e.g., aminocarbonylheteroaryl, ((alkylcarbonyl)amino)heteroaryl, ((((alkyl)amino)alkyl)aminocarbonyl)heteroaryl, (((heteroaryl)amino)carbonyl)heteroaryl, ((heterocycloaliphatic)carbonyl)heteroaryl, and ((alkylcarbonyl)amino)heteroaryl]; (cyanoalkyl)heteroaryl; (alkoxy)heteroaryl; (sulfamoyl)heteroaryl [e.g., (aminosulfonyl)heteroaryl]; (sulfonyl)heteroaryl [e.g., (alkylsulfonyl)heteroaryl]; (hydroxyalkyl)heteroaryl; (alkoxyalkyl)heteroaryl; (hydroxyl)heteroaryl; ((carboxy)alkyl)heteroaryl; [((dialkyl)amino)alkyl]heteroaryl; (heterocycloaliphatic)heteroaryl; (cycloaliphatic)heteroaryl; (nitroalkyl)heteroaryl; (((alkylsulfonyl)amino)alkyl)heteroaryl; ((alkylsulfonyl)alkyl)heteroaryl; (cyanoalkyl)heteroaryl; (acyl)heteroaryl [e.g., (alkylcarbonyl)heteroaryl]; (alkyl)heteroaryl, and (haloalkyl)heteroaryl [e.g., trihaloalkylheteroaryl].
  • A “heteroaraliphatic (such as a heteroaralkyl group) as used herein, refers to an aliphatic group (e.g., a C1-4 alkyl group) that is substituted with a heteroaryl group. “Aliphatic,” “alkyl,” and “heteroaryl” have been defined above.
  • As used herein, an “acyl” group refers to a formyl group or RX—C(O)— (such as -alkyl-C(O)—, also referred to as “alkylcarbonyl”) where RX and “alkyl” have been defined previously. Acetyl and pivaloyl are examples of acyl groups.
  • As used herein, an “alkoxy” group refers to an alkyl-O— group where “alkyl” has been defined previously.
  • As used herein, a “carbamoyl” group refers to a group having the structure —O—CO—NRXRY or —NRX—CO—O—RZ wherein RX and RY have been defined above and RZ can be aliphatic, aryl, araliphatic, heterocycloaliphatic, heteroaryl, or heteroaraliphatic.
  • As used herein, a “carboxy” group refers to —COOH, —COORX, —OC(O)H, —OC(O)RX when used as a terminal group or —OC(O)— or —C(O)O—; when used as an internal group.
  • As used herein, a “haloaliphatic” group refers to an aliphatic group substituted with 1-3 halogen. For instance, the term haloalkyl includes the group —CF3.
  • As used herein, a “mercapto” group refers to —SH.
  • As used herein, a “sulfo” group refers to —SO3H or —SO3RX when used terminally or —S(O)3- when used internally.
  • As used herein, a “sulfamide” group refers to the structure —NRX—S(O)2—NRYRZ when used terminally and —NRX—S(O)2—NRY— when used internally, wherein RX, RY, and RZ have been defined above.
  • As used herein, a “sulfamoyl” group refers to the structure —S(O)2—NRXRY or —NRX—S(O)2—RZ when used terminally or —S(O)2—NRX— or —NRX—S(O)2— when used internally, wherein RX, RY, and RZ are defined above.
  • As used herein a “sulfanyl” group refers to —S—RX when used terminally and —S— when used internally, wherein RX has been defined above. Examples of sulfanyls include alkylsulfanyl.
  • As used herein a “sulfinyl” group refers to —S(O)—RX when used terminally and —S(O)— when used internally, wherein RX has been defined above.
  • As used herein, a “sulfonyl” group refers to —S(O)2—RX when used terminally and —S(O)2— when used internally, wherein RX has been defined above.
  • As used herein, a “sulfoxy” group refers to —O—SO—RX or —SO—O—RX, when used terminally and —O—S(O)— or —S(O)—O— when used internally, where RX has been defined above.
  • As used herein, a “halogen” or “halo” group refers to fluorine, chlorine, bromine or iodine.
  • As used herein, an “alkoxycarbonyl,” which is encompassed by the term carboxy, used alone or in connection with another group refers to a group such as alkyl-O—C(O)—.
  • As used herein, an “alkoxyalkyl” refers to an alkyl group such as alkyl-O-alkyl-, wherein alkyl has been defined above.
  • As used herein, a “carbonyl” refers to —C(O)—.
  • As used herein, an “oxo” refers to ═O.
  • As used herein, an “aminoalkyl” refers to the structure (RX)2N-alkyl-.
  • As used herein, a “cyanoalkyl” refers to the structure (NC)-alkyl-
  • As used herein, a “urea” group refers to the structure —NRX—CO—NRYRZ and a “thiourea” group refers to the structure —NRX—CS—NRYRZ when used terminally and —NRX—CO—NRY— or —NRX—CS—NRY— when used internally, wherein RX, R″, and RZ have been defined above.
  • As used herein, a “guanidine” group refers to the structure —N═C(N(RXRY))N(RXRY) wherein RX and RY have been defined above.
  • As used herein, the term “amidino” group refers to the structure —C═(NRX)N(RXRY) wherein RX and RY have been defined above.
  • The terms “terminally” and “internally” refer to the location of a group within a substituent. A group is terminal when the group is present at the end of the substituent not further bonded to the rest of the chemical structure. Carboxyalkyl, i.e., RXO(O)C-alkyl is an example of a carboxy group used terminally. A group is internal when the group is present in the middle of a substituent to at the end of the substituent bound to the to the rest of the chemical structure. Alkylcarboxy (e.g., alkyl-C(O)O— or alkyl-OC(O)—) and alkylcarboxyaryl (e.g., alkyl-C(O)O-aryl- or alkyl-O(CO)-aryl-) are examples of carboxy groups used internally.
  • The phrase “optionally substituted” is used interchangeably with the phrase “substituted or unsubstituted.” As described herein, compounds of the invention can optionally be substituted with one or more substituents, such as are illustrated generally above, or as exemplified by particular classes, subclasses, and species of the invention. As described herein, the variables contained herein encompass specific groups, such as alkyl and aryl. Unless otherwise noted, each of the specific groups for the variables contained herein can be optionally substituted with one or more substituents described herein. Each substituent of a specific group is further optionally substituted with one to three of halo, cyano, oxoalkoxy, hydroxyl, amino, nitro, aryl, haloalkyl, and alkyl. For instance, an alkyl group can be substituted with alkylsulfanyl and the alkylsulfanyl can be optionally substituted with one to three of halo, cyano, oxoalkoxy, hydroxyl, amino, nitro, aryl, haloalkyl, and alkyl. As an additional example, the cycloalkyl portion of a (cycloalkyl)carbonylamino can be optionally substituted with one to three of halo, cyano, alkoxy, hydroxyl, nitro, haloalkyl, and alkyl. When two alkoxy groups are bound to the same atom or adjacent atoms, the two alkoxy groups can form a ring together with the atom(s) to which they are bound.
  • In general, the term “substituted,” whether preceded by the term “optionally” or not, refers to the replacement of hydrogen radicals in a given structure with the radical of a specified substituent. Specific substituents are described above in the definitions and below in the description of compounds and examples thereof. Unless otherwise indicated, an optionally substituted group can have a substituent at each substitutable position of the group, and when more than one position in any given structure can be substituted with more than one substituent selected from a specified group, the substituent can be either the same or different at every position. A ring substituent, such as a heterocycloalkyl, can be bound to another ring, such as a cycloalkyl, to form a spiro-bicyclic ring system, e.g., both rings share one common atom. As one of ordinary skill in the art will recognize, combinations of substituents envisioned by this invention are those combinations that result in the formation of stable or chemically feasible compounds.
  • The phrase “stable or chemically feasible,” as used herein, refers to compounds that are not substantially altered when subjected to conditions to allow for their production, detection, and preferably their recovery, purification, and use for one or more of the purposes disclosed herein.
  • As used herein, an effective amount is defined as the amount required to confer a therapeutic effect on the treated patient, and is typically determined based on age, surface area, weight and condition of the patient. The interrelationship of dosages for animals and humans (based on milligrams per meter squared of body surface) is described by Freireich et al., Cancer Chemother. Rep., 50: 219 (1966). Body surface area can be approximately determined from height and weight of the patient. See, e.g., Scientific Tables, Geigy Pharmaceuticals, Ardsley, N.Y., 537 (1970).
  • Unless otherwise stated, structures depicted herein are also meant to include all isomeric (e.g., enantiomeric, diastereomeric, and geometric (or conformational)) forms of the structure; for example, the R and S configurations for each asymmetric center, (Z) and (E) double bond isomers, and (Z) and (E) conformational isomers. Therefore, single stereochemical isomers as well as enantiomeric, diastereomeric, and geometric (or conformational) mixtures of the present compounds are within the scope of the invention. Unless otherwise stated, all tautomeric forms of the compounds of the invention are within the scope of the invention. Additionally, unless otherwise stated, structures depicted herein are also meant to include compounds that differ only in the presence of one or more isotopically enriched atoms. For example, compounds having the present structures except for the replacement of hydrogen by deuterium or tritium, or the replacement of a carbon by a 13C- or 14C-enriched carbon are within the scope of this invention. Such compounds are useful, for example, as analytical tools or probes in biological assays.
  • II. Oncogene Targets
  • In some embodiments, the present invention provides antigene inhibitors of oncogenes. The present invention is not limited to the inhibition of a particular oncogene. Indeed, the present invention encompasses antigene inhibitors to any number of oncogenes including, but not limited to, those disclosed herein.
  • A. Ras
  • One gene which has captured the attention of many scientists is the human proto-oncogene, c-Ha-ras. This gene acts as a central dispatcher, relaying chemical signals into cells and controlling cell division. Ras gene alteration may cause the gene to stay in the “on” position. The ras oncogene is believed to underlie up to 30% of cancer, including colon cancer, lung cancer, bladder and mammary carcinoma (Bos, Cancer Res. 49:4682-4689 [1989]). The ras oncogene has therefore become a target for therapeutic drugs.
  • There are several reports showing that oligonucleotides complementary to various sites of ras mRNA can inhibit synthesis of ras protein (p21), which decreases the cell proliferation rate in cell culture (U.S. Pat. No. 5,576,208; U.S. Pat. No. 5,582,986; Daska et al., Oncogene Res. 5:267-275 [1990]; Brown et al., Oncogene Res. 4:243-252 [1989]; Saison-Behmoaras et al., EMBO J. 10:1111-1116 [1991)]. Oligonucleotides complementary to the 5′ flanking region of the c-Ha-ras RNA transcript have shown to inhibit tumor growth in nude mice for up to 14 days (Gray et al., Cancer Res. 53:577-580 [1993]). It was recently reported that an antisense oligonucleotide directed to a point mutation (G>C) in codon 12 of the c-Ha-ras mRNA inhibited cell proliferation as well as tumor growth in nude mice when it was injected subcutaneously (U.S. Pat. No. 5,576,208; U.S. Pat. No. 5,582,986; Schwab et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 91:10460-10464 [1994]; each of which is herein incorporated by reference). Researchers have also reported that antisense drugs shrank ovarian tumors in small clinical trials (Roush et al., Science 276:1192-1194 [1997]).
  • B. Her-2
  • The -her-2 (also known as neu oncogene or erbB-2) oncogene encodes a receptor-like tyrosine kinase (RTK) that has been extensively investigated because of its role in several human carcinomas (Hynes and Stern, Biochim. et Biophy. Acta 1198:165-184 [1994]; Dougall et al., Oncogene 9:2109-2123 [1994]) and in mammalian development (Lee et al., Nature 378:394-398 [1995]). Her-2 is one of the most frequently altered genes in cancer. It encodes a transmembrane receptor (also known as p185) with tyrosine kinase activity and is a member of the epidermal growth factor (EGF) family, and thus is related to the epidermal growth factor receptor (EGFR or HER-1). Aberrant her-2 gene expression is present in a wide variety of cancers and is most common in breast, ovarian and gastric cancers. HER-2 is overexpressed in 25-30% of all human breast and ovarian cancers. Levels of HER-2 overexpression correlate well with clinical stage of breast cancer, prognosis and metastatic potential. Overexpression of HER-2 is associated with lower survival rates, increased relapse rates and increased metastatic potential. Tan et al., (Cancer Res., 57:1199 [1997]) have shown that overexpression of the HER-2 gene increases the metastatic potential of breast cancer cells without increasing their transformation ability.
  • Aberrant expression of HER-2 includes both increased expression of normal HER-2 and expression of mutant HER-2. Activation of the her-2 proto-oncogene can occur by any of three mechanisms—point mutation, gene amplification and overexpression. Gene amplification is the most common mechanism. Unlike the other EGF family members for whom ligand activation is necessary for promoting transformation, overexpression of HER-2 alone is sufficient for transformation (Cohen, et al., J. Biol. Chem., 271:30897 [1996]).
  • Several therapeutic approaches have been used to reduce levels of the her-2 gene product. The adenovirus type 5 gene product E1A has been studied as a potential therapeutic using a breast cancer model in nude mice. This gene product can repress her-2/neu overexpression by repressing her-2/neu promoter activity, and suppress the tumorigenic potential of her-2/neu-overexpressing ovarian cancer cells. In mice bearing her-2/neu-overexpressing breast cancer xenografts, E1A delivered either by adenovirus or liposome significantly inhibited tumor growth and prolonged mouse survival compared with the controls (Chang et al., Oncogene 14:561 [1997]). Clinical trials have been conducted to evaluate a bispecific antibody which targets the extracellular domains of both the HER-2/neu protein product and Fc gamma RIII (CD16), the Fc gamma receptor expressed by human natural killer cells, neutrophils, and differentiated mononuclear phagocytes (Weiner et al., J. Hematotherapy, 4:471 [1995]).
  • Overexpression of HER-2 has also been found to be associated with increased resistance to chemotherapy. Thus, patients with elevated levels of HER-2 respond poorly to many drugs. Methods used to inhibit HER-2 expression have been combined with commonly used chemotherapeutic agents (Ueno et al., Oncogone 15:953 [1997]). Combining the adenovirus type 5 gene product, E1A, with taxol showed a synergistic effect in human breast cancer cells. Zhang et al., (Oncogene, 12:571 [1996]) demonstrated that emodin, a tyrosine-specific inhibitor, sensitized non-small cell lung cancer (NSCLC) cells to a variety of chemotherapeutic drugs, including cisplatin, doxorubicin and etoposide. A HER-2 antibody was found to increase the efficacy of tamoxifen in human breast cancer cells (Witters et al., Breast Cancer Res. and Treatment, 42:1 [1997]).
  • Oligonucleotides have also been used to study the function of HER-2. A triplex-forming oligonucleotide targeted to the her-2 promoter, 42 to 69 nucleotides upstream of the mRNA transcription start site was found to inhibit HER-2 expression in vitro (Ebbinghaus et al., J. Clin. Invest., 92:2433 [1993]). Porumb et al. (Cancer Res., 56:515 [1996]) also used a triplex-forming oligonucleotide targeted to the same her-2 promoter region. Decreases in her-2 mRNA and protein levels were seen in cultured cells. Juhl et al. (J. Biol. Chem., 272:29482 [1997]) used anti-her-2 ribozymes targeted to a central region of the her-2 RNA just downstream of the transmembrane region of the protein to demonstrate a reduction in her-2 mRNA and protein levels in human ovarian cancer cells. A reduction in tumor growth in nude mice was also seen.
  • An antisense approach has been used as a potential therapeutic for HER-2 overexpressing cancers. Pegues et al. (Cancer Lett., 117:73 [1997]) cloned a 1.5 kb fragment of her-2 in an antisense orientation into an expression vector; transfecting of this construct into ovarian cancer cells resulted in a reduction of anchorage-independent growth. Casalini et al. (Int. J. Cancer 72:631 [1997]) used several human her-2 antisense vector constructs, containing her-2 fragments from 151 by to 415 by in length, to demonstrate reduction in HER-2 protein levels and anchorage-independent growth in lung adenocarcinoma cells. Colomer et al. (Br. J. Cancer, 70:819 [1994]) showed that phosphodiester antisense oligonucleotides targeted at or immediately downstream of, the translation initiation codon inhibited proliferation of human breast cancer cells by up to 60%. Wiechen et al. (Int. J. Cancer 63:604 [1995]) demonstrated that an 18-nucleotide phosphorothioate oligonucleotide targeted to the coding region, 33 nucleotides downstream of the translation initiation codon, of her-2 reduced anchorage-independent growth of ovarian cancer cells. Bertram et al. (Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun., 200:661 [1994]) used antisense phosphorothioate oligonucleotides targeted to the translation initiation region and a sequence at the 3′ part of the translated region of the mRNA which has high homology to a tyrosine kinase consensus sequence, and demonstrated a 75% reduction in HER-2 protein levels in human breast cancer cells. Liu et al., (Antisense and Nucleic Acid Drug Develop., 6:9 [1996]) used antisense phosphorothioate oligonucleotides targeted to the 5′ cap site and coding region. The most effective oligonucleotide, targeted to the 5′ cap site, reduced HER-2 protein expression by 90%. Cell proliferation was also reduced by a comparable amount. Vaughn et al. (Nuc. Acids Res., 24:4558 [1996]) used phosphorothioate, phosphorodithioate and chimeric antisense oligonucleotides targeted at or adjacent to (either side) the translation initiation region of her-2. An alternating dithioate/diester oligonucleotide targeted to the translation initiation region worked slightly better than an all phosphorothioate oligonucleotide. Brysch et al. (Cancer Gene Ther., 1: 99 [1994]) used chemically modified antisense oligonucleotides targeted to the translation initiation codon of HER-2 to reduce protein levels and cause growth arrest of human breast cancer cell line.
  • C. C-Myc
  • The c-myc gene product is encoded by an immediate early response gene, the expression of which can be induced by various mitogens. C-myc expression is involved in signal transduction pathways leading to cell division. Studies have demonstrated that proliferating cells have higher levels of c-myc mRNA and c-myc protein than do quiescent cells. Antibodies directed against the human c-myc protein are known to inhibit DNA synthesis in nuclei isolated from human cells. Conversely, constitutive expression of c-myc produced by gene transfer inhibits induced differentiation of several cell lines. Constitutive expression of c-myc predisposes transgenic mice to the development of tumors.
  • Some studies have suggested that the c-myc gene product may play a proliferative role in smooth muscle cells (SMCs). Balloon de-endothelialization and injury of rat aortas is known to increase c-myc mRNA expression of vascular SMC prior to their subsequent proliferation and migration. Also, SMCs in culture proliferate when exposed to several mitogens, including PDGF, FGF, EGF, IGF-1 and to serum. Each of these mitogens has been found to be capable of increasing the expression in other cell lines of either c-myc protein, c-myc mRNA, or both. Additionally, blood serum has been found to increase c-myc mRNA levels in SMCs.
  • Harel-Bellan et al. (J. Immun. 140; 2431-2435 (1988)) demonstrated that antisense oligonucleotides complementary to c-myc mRNA effectively inhibited the translation thereof in human T cells. These T cells were prevented from entering the S phase of cell division. c-myc proto-oncogene sequences are described in Marcu et al., Ann. Rev. Biochem., 61:809-860 [1992]; Watt et al., Nature, 303:725-728 [1983)]; Battey et al., Cell, 34:779-787 (1983); and Epstein et al, NTIS publication PB93-100576
  • D. Bcl-2
  • In many types of human tumors, including lymphomas and leukemias, the bcl-2 gene is overexpressed, and may be associated with tumorigenicity (Tsujimoto et al., Science 228:1440-1443 [1985]). High levels of expression of the bcl-2 gene have been found in all lymphomas with t (14; 18) chromosomal translocations including most follicular B cell lymphomas and many large cell non-Hodgkin's lymphomas. High levels of expression of the bcl-2 gene have also been found in certain leukemias that do not have a t(14; 18) chromosomal translation, including most cases of chronic lymphocytic leukemia acute, many lymphocytic leukemias of the pre-B cell type, neuroblastomas, nasopharyngeal carcinomas, and many adenocarcinomas of the prostate, breast and colon. (Reed et al., Cancer Res. 51:6529 [1991]; Yunis et al., New England J. Med. 320:1047; Campos et al., Blood 81:3091-3096 [1993]; McDonnell et al., Cancer Res. 52:6940-6944 [1992); Lu et al., Int. J Cancer 53:29-35 [1993]; Bonner et al., Lab Invest. 68:43A [1993]).
  • E. TGF-α
  • Transforming Growth Factor Alpha (TGF-α) is a polypeptide of 50 amino acids. It was first isolated from a retrovirus-transformed mouse cell line and subsequently was identified in human tumor cells, in early rat embryo cells and in cell cultures from the human pituitary gland. TGF-α is closely related to Epidermal Growth Factor (EGF), both structurally and functionally, and both bind to the same receptor, i.e., Epidermal Growth Factor Receptor (EGFR). The sequence and three dimensional structure of both EGF and TGF-α have been determined (Campbell et al., Prog. Growth Factor Res. 1:13 [1989]). TGF-α is a 50 amino acid polypeptide having about 40% homology of residues with EGF. Both peptides are characterized by three well defined loops (denoted A, B and C) and have three intramolecular disulphide bonds.
  • Several growth factors, including TGF-α and EGF, are believed to exert their biological effects via interaction with the Epidermal Growth Factor Receptor (EGF Receptor). The EGF Receptor is a Type 1 receptor tyrosine kinase. The EGF Receptor and its ligands are of interest for their roles in normal physiological processes as well as in hyperproliferative and neoplastic diseases.
  • The in vivo precursor of TGF-α is a 160 amino acid residue membrane-bound protein (pro-TGF-.alpha.) that is cleaved to yield a soluble compound (Massague, J. Biol. Chem., 265:21393-21396 [1990]). This cleavage removes an extracellular portion comprised of 50 amino acids with a molecular weight of 6 Kd and is considered to be an important regulatory event (Pandiella et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 88:1726-1730 [1990]) that can be stimulated by phorbol esters acting via protein kinase C (Pandiella et al., J. Biol. Chem., 266:5769-5773 [1991]).
  • Cultured human prostatic tumor lines contain elevated levels of TGF-α mRNA and proliferate in response to TGF-α (Wilding et al., The Prostate, 15:1-12 [1989]). TGF-α appears to have both autocrine and paracrine function, stimulating physiologic activities such as cell division and angiogenesis. When induced in transgenic mice, TGF-α produced epithelial hyperplasia and focal dysplastic changes that resembled carcinoma in situ (Sandgren et al., Cell, 61:1121-1135 [1990]).
  • F. c-ki-Ras
  • The c-Ki-Ras (KRAS) oncogene is expressed ubiquitously. KRAS, with a length of more than 30 kb, is much larger than HRAS or NRAS. Although the 3 ras genes, HRAS, KRAS, and NRAS, have different genetic structures, all code for proteins of 189 amino acid residues, generically designated p21. These genes acquire malignant properties by single point mutations that affect the incorporation of the 12th or 61st amino acid residue of their respective p21. KRAS is involved in malignancy much more often than is HRAS. In a study of 96 human tumors or tumor cell lines in the NIH 3T3 transforming system, (Pulciani et al., Nature 300: 539 (1982) found a mutated HRAS locus only in T24 bladder cancer cells, whereas transforming KRAS genes were identified in 8 different carcinomas and sarcomas.
  • In a serous cystadenocarcinoma of the ovary, Feig et al. (Science 223: 698 (1984)) showed the presence of an activated KRAS oncogene not activated in normal cells of the same patient. The transforming gene product displayed an electrophoretic mobility in SDS-polyacrylamide gels that differed from the mobility of KRAS transforming proteins in other tumors. Thus, a previously undescribed mutation was responsible for activation of KRAS in this ovarian carcinoma. To study the role of oncogenes in lung cancer, Rodenhuis et al. (New Eng. J. Med. 317: 929 (1987)) used an assay based on oligonucleotide hybridization following an in vitro amplification step. Genomic DNA was examined from 39 tumor specimens obtained at thoracotomy. The KRAS gene was found to be activated by point mutations in codon 12 in 5 of 10 adenocarcinomas. Two of these tumors were less than 2 cm in size and had not metastasized. No HRAS, KRAS, or NRAS mutations were observed in 15 squamous cell carcinomas, 10 large cell carcinomas, 1 carcinoid, 2 metastatic adenocarcinomas from primary tumors outside the lung, and 1 small cell carcinoma. An approximately 20-fold amplification of the unmutated KRAS gene was observed in a tumor that proved to be a solitary lung metastasis of a rectal carcinoma. Yanez et al. (Oncogene 1:315 (1987)) found mutations in codon 12 of the KRAS gene in 4 of 16 colon cancers, 2 of 27 lung cancers, and 1 of 8 breast cancers; no mutations were found at position 61. Of the 6 possible amino acid replacements in codon 12, all but one were represented in the 7 mutations identified.
  • G. Other Oncogene Targets
  • The present invention is not limited to the oncogenes described above. The methods of the present invention are suitable for use with any oncogene with a known promoter region. Exemplary oncogenes included, but are not limited to, BCR/ABL, ABL1/BCR, ABL, BCL1, CD24, CDK4, EGFR/ERBB-1, HSTF1, INT1/WNT1, INT2, MDM2, MET, MYB, MYC, MYCN, MYCL1, RAF1, NRAS, REL, AKT2, APC, BCL2-ALPHA, BCL2-BETA, BCL3, BCR, BRCA1, BRCA2, CBL, CCND1, CDKN1A, CDKN1C, CDKN2A, CDKN2B, CRK, CRK-II, CSF1R/FMS, DBL, DDOST, DCC, DPC4/SMAD4, E-CAD, E2F1/RBAP, ELK1, ELK3, EPH, EPHA1, E2F1, EPHA3, ERG, ETS1, ETS2, FER, FGR, FLI1/ERGB2, FOS, FPS/FES, FRA1, FRA2, FYN, HCK, HEK, HER3/ERBB-2, ERBB-3, HER4/ERBB-4, HST2, INK4A, INK4B, JUN, JUNB, JUND, KIP2, KIT, KRAS2A, KRAS2B, LCK, LYN, MAS, MAX, MCC, MLH1, MOS, MSH2, MYBA, MYBB, NF1, NF2, P53, PDGFB, PIM1, PTC, RB1, RET, ROS1, SKI, SRC1, TAL1, TGFBR2, THRA1, THRB, TIAM1, TRK, VAV, VHL, WAF1, WNT2, WT1, YES1, ALK/NPM1, AMI1, AXL, FMS, GIP, GLI, GSP, HOX11, HST, IL3, INT2, KS3, K-SAM, LBC, LMO-1, LMO-2, L-MYC, LYL1, LYT-10, MDM-2, MLH1, MLL, MLM, N-MYC, OST, PAX-5, PMS-1, PMS-2, PRAD-1, RAF, RHOM-1, RHOM-2, SIS, TAL2, TAN1, TIAM1, TSC2, TRK, TSC1, STK11, PTCH, MEN1, MEN2, P57/KIP2, PTEN, HPC1, ATM, XPA/XPG, BCL6, DEK, AKAP13, CDH1, BLM, EWSR1/FLI1, FES, FGF3, FGF4, FGF6, FANCA, FLI1/ERGB2, FOSL1, FOSL2, GLI, HRAS1, HRX/MLLT1, HRX/MLLT2, KRAS2, MADH4, MAS1, MCF2, MLLT1/MLL, MLLT2/HRX, MTG8/RUNX1, MYCLK1, MYH11/CBFB, NFKB2, NOTCH1, NPM1/ALK, NRG/REL, NTRK1, PBX1/TCF3, PML/RARA, PRCA1, RUNX1, RUNX1/CBFA2T1, SET, TCF3/PBX1, TGFB1, TLX1, P53, WNT1, WNT2, WT1, αv-β3, PKCα, TNFα, Clusterin, Surviving, TGFβ, c-fos, c-SRC, and INT-1.
  • III. Non-Oncogene Targets
  • The present invention is not limited to the targeting of oncogenes. The methods and compositions of the present invention find use in the targeting of any gene of which it is desirable to down regulate the expression. For example, in some embodiments, the genes to be targeted include, but are not limited to, an immunoglobulin or antibody gene, a clotting factor gene, a protease, a pituitary hormone, a protease inhibitor, a growth factor, a somatomedian, a gonadotrophin, a chemotactin, a chemokine, a plasma protein, a plasma protease inhibitor, an interleukin, an interferon, a cytokine, a transcription factor, or a pathogen target (e.g., a viral gene, a bacterial gene, a microbial gene, a fungal gene).
  • Examples of specific genes include, but are not limited to, ADAMTS4, ADAMTS5, APOA1, APOE, APP, B2M, COX2, CRP, DDX25, DMC1, FKBP8, GH1, GHR, IAPP, IFNA1, IFNG, ILL 1110, IL12, IL13, IL2, IL4, IL7, IL8, IPW, MAPK14, Mei1, MMP13, MYD88, NDN, PACE4, PRNP, PSEN1, PSEN2, RAD51, RAD51C, SAP, SNRPN, TLR4, TLR9, TTR, UBE3A, VLA-4, and PTP-1B, c-RAF, m-TOR, LDL, VLDL, ApoB-100, HDL, VEGF, rhPDGF-BB, NADs, ICAM-1, MUC1, 2-dG, CTL, PSGL-1, E2F, NF-kB, HIF, and GCPRs.
  • In other embodiments, a gene from a pathogen is targeted. Exemplary pathogens include, without limitation, Human Immunodeficiency virus, Hepatitis B virus, hepatitis C virus, hepatitis A virus, respiratory syncytial virus, pathogens involved in severe acute respiratory syndrome, west nile virus, and food borne pathogens (e.g., E. coli).
  • IV. Abbreviations
  • Abbreviations for lipids refer primarily to standard use in the literature and are included here as a helpful reference:
      • DMPC Dimyristoylphosphatidylcholine
      • DPPC Dipalmitoylphosphatidylcholine
      • DSPC Distearoylphosphatidylcholine
      • POPC Palmitoyl-oleoylphosphatidylcholine
      • OPPC 1-oleoyl-2-palmitoyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphocholine
      • DOPC Dioleoylphosphatidylcholine
      • DOPE Dioleoylphosphatidylethanolamine
      • DMPE Dimyristoylphosphatidylethanolamine
      • DPPE Dipalmitoylphosphatidylethanolamine
      • DOPG Dioleoylphosphatidylglycerol
      • POPG Palmitoyl-oleoylphosphatidylglycerol
      • DMPG Dimyristoylphosphatidylglycerol
      • DPPG Dipalmitoylphosphatidylglycerol
      • DLPG Dilaurylphosphatidylglycerol
      • DSPG Distraroylphosphatidylglycerol
      • DMPS Dimyristoylphosphatidylserine
      • DPPS Dipalmitoylphosphatidylserine
      • DOPS Dioleoylphosphatidylserine
      • POPS Palmitoyl-oleoylphosphatidylserine
      • DMPA Dimyristoylphosphatidic acid
      • DPPA Dipalmitoylphosphatidic acid
      • DOPA Dioleoylphosphatidic acid
      • POPA Palmitoyl-oleoylphosphatidic acid
      • DSPA Distearoylphosphatidic acid
      • DLPA Dilaurylphosphatidic acid
      • CHEMS Cholesterolhemisuccinate
      • DC-Chol 3-β-[N—(N′,N′-dimethylethane)carbamoyl]cholesterol
      • Cet-P Cetylphosphate
      • DODAP (1,2)-dioleoyloxypropyl)-N,N-dimethylammonium chloride
      • DOEPC 1,2-dioleoyl-sn-glycero-3-ethylphosphocholine
      • DAC-Chol 3-β-[N—(N,N′-dimethylethane)carbamoyl]cholesterol
      • TC-Chol 3-β-[N—(N′,N′,N′-trimethylaminoethane)carbamoyl]cholesterol
      • DOTMA (1,2-dioleyloxypropyl)-N,N,N-trimethylammoniumchloride)
      • (Lipofectin®)
      • DOGS ((C18)2GlySper3+) N,N-dioctadecylamido-glycyl-spermine (Transfectam®)
      • CTAB Cetyl-trimethylammoniumbromide
      • CPyC Cetyl-pyridiniumchloride
      • DOTAP (1,2-dioleoyloxypropyl)-N,N,N-trimethylammonium salt
      • DMTAP (1,2-dimyristoyloxypropyl)-N,N,N-trimethylammonium salt
      • DPTAP (1,2-dipalmitoyloxypropyl)-N,N,N-trimethylammonium salt
      • DOTMA (1,2-dioleyloxypropyl)-N,N,N-trimethylammonium chloride)
      • DORIE (1,2-dioleyloxypropyl)-3 dimethylhydroxyethyl ammoniumbromide)
      • DDAB Dimethyldioctadecylammonium bromide
      • DPIM 4-(2,3-bis-palmitoyloxy-propyl)-1-methyl-1H-imidazole
      • CHIM Histaminyl-Cholesterolcarbamate
      • MoChol 4-(2-Aminoethyl)-Morpholino-Cholesterolhemisuccinate
      • HisChol Histaminyl-Cholesterolhemisuccinate
      • HCChol Nα-Histidinyl-Cholesterolcarbamate
      • HistChol Nα-Histidinyl-Cholesterol-hemisuccinate
      • AC Acylcarnosine, Stearyl- & Palmitoylcarnosine
      • HistDG 1,2-Dipalmitoylglycerol-hemisuccinat-N_-Histidinyl-hemisuccinate, & Distearoyl-, Dimyristoyl, Dioleoyl or palmitoyl-oleoylderivatives
      • IsoHistSuccDG 1,2-ipalmitoylglycerol-Q-Histidinyl-Nα-hemisuccinat, & Distearoyl-, Dimyristoyl, Dioleoyl or palmitoyl-oleoylderivatives
      • DGSucc 1,2-Dipalmitoyglycerol-3-hemisuccinate & Distearoyl-, dimyristoyl-Dioleoyl or palmitoyl-oleoylderivatives
      • EDTA-Chol cholesterol ester of ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid
      • Hist-PS Nα-histidinyl-phosphatidylserine
      • BGSC bisguanidinium-spermidine-cholesterol
      • BGTC bisguanidinium-tren-cholesterol
      • DOSPER (1,3-dioleoyloxy-2-(6-carboxy-spermyl)-propylamide
      • DOSC (1,2-dioleoyl-3-succinyl-sn-glyceryl choline ester)
      • DOGSDO (1,2-dioleoyl-sn-glycero-3-succinyl-2-hydroxyethyl disulfide ornithine)
      • DOGSucc 1,2-Dioleoylglycerol-3-hemisucinate
      • POGSucc Palimtolyl-oleoylglycerol-oleoyl-3-hemisuccinate
      • DMGSucc 1,2-Dimyristoylglycerol-3-hemisuccinate
      • DPGSucc 1,2-Dipalmitoylglycerol-3-hemisuccinate
  • The following table provides non-limiting examples of lipids that are suitable for use in the compositions in accordance with the present invention. The membrane anchors of the lipids are shown exemplarily and serve only to illustrate the lipids of the invention and are not intended to limit the same.
  • Figure US20150118291A1-20150430-C00001
    Figure US20150118291A1-20150430-C00002
  • V. Amphoteric Liposomal Delivery System
  • Amphoteric liposomes represent a recently described class of liposomes having anionic or neutral charge at about pH 7.5 and cationic charge at pH 4. PCT International Publication Numbers WO 02/066490, WO 02/066120 and WO 03/070220, each of which is incorporated by reference, give a detailed description of amphotheric liposomes and suitable lipids therefor. Using amphoteric liposomes as carriers of DNAi oligonucleotides according to the present invention, to treat cancer in cells and in mammals, such as by inhibiting and/or reducing tumor growth, requires that the liposomes be stable in the bloodstream and in tissues. Particularly, after a systemic application, the DNAI oligonucleotides must be stably sequestered in the liposomes until eventual uptake in the target tissue or cells. Accordingly, the guidelines for liposomal formulations of the FDA regulate specific preclinical tests for liposomal drugs (http://www.fda.gov/cder/guidance/2191dft.pdf). For example, the ratio of encapsulated drug to free drug must be determined during the circulation time in the blood stream.
  • After injection of liposomes into the blood stream, serum components interact with the liposomes and can lead to permeabilization of the liposomes. However, release of a drug or molecule that is encapsulated in a liposome depends on molecular dimensions of the drug or molecule. Consequently, a plasmid of thousands of base pairs is released much more slowly than smaller oligonucleotides or other small molecules. For liposomal delivery of drugs or molecules, it is essential that the release of the drug during circulation of the liposomes in the bloodstream be as low as possible.
  • The amphoteric liposomes of the mixture according to the present invention, include one or more amphoteric lipids or alternatively a mix of anionic and cationic lipid components with amphoteric properties. Suitable amphoteric lipids are disclosed in PCT International Publication Number WO02/066489 as well as in PCT International Publication Number WO03/070735, the contents of both of which are incorporated herein by reference. Alternatively, the lipid phase may be formulated using pH-responsive anionic and/or cationic components, as disclosed in PCT International Publication Number WO02/066012, the contents of which are incorporated by reference herein. Cationic lipids sensitive to pH are disclosed in PCT International Publication Numbers WO02/066490 and WO03/070220, in Budker, et al. 1996, Nat. Biotechnol. 14(6):760-4, and in U.S. Pat. No. 6,258,792 the contents of which are incorporated by reference herein, and can be used in combination with constitutively charged anionic lipids or with anionic lipids that are sensitive to pH. Conversely, the cationic charge may also be introduced from constitutively charged lipids that are known to those skilled in the art in combination with a pH sensitive anionic lipid. (See also PCT International Publication Numbers WO05/094783, WO03/070735, WO04/100928, WO06/48329, WO06/053646 and U.S. Patent applications 2003/0099697, 2005/0164963, 2004/0120997, 2006/002991, 2006/159737, 2006/0216343, each of which is also incorporated in its entirety by reference.)
  • The mixtures of the present invention include 1) amphoteric lipids or a mixture of lipid components with amphoteric properties 2) neutral lipids; and 3) one or more DNAi oligonucleotides as defined above.
  • A. Lipids used in Amphoteric Liposomes
  • 1. Amphoteric Lipids
  • Amphoteric lipids are disclosed in PCT International Publication Numbers WO02/066489 and WO03/070735, the contents of both of which are incorporated herein by reference. The overall molecule assumes its pH-dependent charge characteristics by the simultaneous presence of cationic and anionic groups in the “amphoteric substance” molecule portion. More specifically, an amphoteric substance is characterized by the fact that the sum of its charge components will be precisely zero at a particular pH value. This point is referred to as isoelectric point (IP). Above the IP, the compound has a negative charge, and below the IP it is to be regarded as a positive cation, the IP of the amphoteric lipids ranging between 4.5 and 8.5.
  • The overall charge of the molecule at a particular pH value of the medium can be calculated as follows:

  • z=Σni×((qi−1)+(10(pK−pH)/(1+10(pK−pH)))
      • qi: absolute charge of the ionic group below the pK thereof (e.g. carboxyl=0, single-nitrogen base=1, di-esterified phosphate group=−1)
      • ni: number of such groups in the molecule.
  • For example, a compound is formed by coupling the amino group of histidine to cholesterol hemisuccinate. At a neutral pH value of 7, the product has a negative charge because the carboxyl function which is present therein is in its fully dissociated form, and the imidazole function only has low charge. At an acid pH value of about 4, the situation is reversed: the carboxyl function now is largely discharged, while the imidazole group is essentially fully protonated, and the overall charge of the molecule therefore is positive.
  • In one embodiment, the amphoteric lipid is selected from the group consisting of HistChol, HistDG, isoHistSuccDG, Acylcarnosine and HCChol. In another embodiment, the amphoteric lipid is HistChol.
  • Amphoteric lipids can include, without limitation, derivatives of cationic lipids which include an anionic substituent. Amphoteric lipids include, without limitation, the compounds having the structure of the formula:

  • Z—X—W1-Y—W2-HET
      • wherein:
      • Z is a sterol or an aliphatic;
      • Sterol is selected from the group consisting of cholesterol, sitosterol, campesterol, desmosterol, fucosterol, 22-ketosterol, 20-hydroxysterol, sigmasterol, 22-hydroxycholesterol, 25 hydroxycholesterol, lanosterol, 7-dehydrocholesteril, dihydrocholesterol, 19-hydroxycholesterol, 5αcholest-7-en-3β-ol, 7-hydroxycholesterol, epicholesterol, ergosterol dehydroergosterol, and derivatives thereof;
      • Each W1 is independently an unsubstituted aliphatic;
      • Each W2 is independently an aliphatic optionally substituted with HO(O)C-aliphatic-amino or carboxy;
      • Each X and Y is independently absent, —(C═O)—O—, —(C═O)—NH—, —(C═O)—S—, —O—, —NH—, —S—, —CH═N—, —O—(O═C)—, —S—(O═C)—, —NH—(O═C)—, and —N═CH—; and
      • HET is an amino, an optionally substituted heterocycloaliphatic or an optionally substituted heteroaryl.
  • In some aspects, the HET is an optionally substituted heterocycloaliphatic including at least one nitrogen ring atom, or an optionally substituted heteroaryl including at least one nitrogen ring atom. In other aspects, the HET is morpholinyl, piperidinyl, piperazinlyl, pyrimidinyl, or pyridinyl. In another aspect, the cationic lipid has the structure Sterol-X-spacer1-Y-spacer2-morpholinyl or Sterol-X-spacer1-Y-spacer2-imidazolyl. In still further aspects, the sterol is cholesterol.
  • In other embodiments, amphoteric lipids include, without limitation, the compounds having the structure of the formula:

  • Z—X—W1-Y—W2-HET
      • wherein:
      • Z is a structure according to the general formula
  • Figure US20150118291A1-20150430-C00003
      • wherein R1 and R2 are independently C8-C30 alkyl or acyl chains with 0.1. pr 2 etju; emoca; u imsatirated bpmds amd M is selected from the group consisting of —O—(C═O); —NH—(C═O)—; —S—(C═O)—; —O—; —NH—; —S—; —N═CH—; —(O═C)—O—; —S—(O═C)—; —NH—(O═C)—; —N═CH— and/or —S—S—;
      • Sterol is selected from the group consisting of cholesterol, sitosterol, campesterol, desmosterol, fucosterol, 22-ketosterol, 20-hydroxysterol, sigmasterol, 22-hydroxycholesterol, 25 hydroxycholesterol, lanosterol, 7-dehydrocholesterol, dihydrocholesterol, 19-hydroxycholesterol, 5αcholest-7-en-3β-ol, 7-hydroxycholesterol, epicholesterol, ergosterol dehydroergosterol, and derivatives thereof;
      • Each W1 is independently an unsubstituted aliphatic with up to 8 carbon atoms;
      • Each W2 is independently an aliphatic, carboxylic acid with up to 8 carbon atoms and 0, 1, or 2 ethylenically unsaturated bonds;
      • X is absent and Y is —(C═O)—O—; —(C═O)—NH—; —NH—(C═O)—O—; —O—; —NH—; —CH═N—; —O—(O═C)—; —S—; —(O═C)—; —NH—(O═C)—; —O—(O═C)—NH—, —N═CH— and/or —S—S—; and
      • HET is an amino, an optionally substituted heterocycloaliphatic or an optionally substituted heteroaryl.
  • In some aspects, the HET is an optionally substituted heterocycloaliphatic including at least one nitrogen ring atom, or an optionally substituted heteroaryl including at least one nitrogen ring atom. In other aspects, the HET is morpholinyl, piperidinyl, piperazinlyl, pyrimidinyl, or pyridinyl. In another aspect, the cationic lipid has the structure Sterol-X-spacer1-Y-spacer2-morpholinyl or Sterol-X-spacer1-Y-spacer2-imidazolyl. In still further aspects, the sterol is cholesterol.
  • 2. Mixtures of Lipid Components with Amphoteric Properties
  • Alternatively, the lipid phase can be formulated using pH-responsive anionic and/or cationic components, as disclosed in PCT International Publication Number WO02/066012, the contents of which are incorporated by reference herein. Cationic lipids sensitive to pH are disclosed in PCT International Publication Numbers WO02/066490 and WO03/070220, in Budker, et al. (1996), Nat Biotechnol. 14(6):760-4, and in U.S. Pat. No. 6,258,792, the contents of all of which are incorporated by reference herein. Alternatively, the cationic charge may be introduced from constitutively charged lipids known to those skilled in the art in combination with a pH sensitive anionic lipid. Combinations of constitutively (e.g., stable charge over a specific pH range such as a pH between about 4 and 9) charged anionic and cationic lipids, e.g. DOTAP and DPPG are not preferred. Thus, in some embodiments, the mixture of lipid components may comprise (i) a stable cationic lipid and a chargeable anionic lipid, (ii) a chargeable cationic lipid and chargeable anionic lipid or (iii) a stable anionic lipid and a chargeable cationic lipid.
  • The charged groups can be divided into the following 4 groups.
  • (1) Strongly (e.g., constitutively charged) cationic, pKa>9, net positive charge: on the basis of their chemical nature, these are, for example, ammonium, amidinium, guanidium or pyridinium groups or timely, secondary or tertiary amino functions.
  • (2) Weakly cationic, pKa<9, net positive charge: on the basis of their chemical nature, these are, in particular, nitrogen bases such as piperazines, imidazoles and morpholines, purines or pyrimidines. Such molecular fragments, which occur in biological systems, are, for example, 4-imidazoles (histamine), 2-, 6-, or 9-purines (adenines, guanines, adenosines or guanosines), 1-, 2- or 4-pyrimidines (uracils, thymines, cytosines, uridines, thymidines, cytidines) or also pyridine-3-carboxylic acids (nicotinic esters or amides). Nitrogen bases with preferred pKa values are also formed by substituting nitrogen atoms one or more times with low molecular weight alkane hydroxyls, such as hydroxymethyl or hydroxyethyl groups. For example, aminodihydroxypropanes, triethanolamines, tris-(hydroxymethyl)methylamines, bis-(hydroxymethyl)methylamines, tris-(hydroxyethyl)methylamines, bis-(hydroxyethyl)methylamines or the corresponding substituted ethylamines.
  • (3) Weakly anionic, pKa>4, net negative charge: on the basis of their chemical nature, these are, in particular, the carboxylic acids. These include the aliphatic, linear or branched mono-, di- or tricarboxylic acids with up to 12 carbon atoms and 0, 1 or 2 ethylenically unsaturated bonds. Carboxylic acids of suitable behavior are also found as substitutes of aromatic systems. Other weakly anionic groups are hydroxyls or thiols, which can dissociate and occur in ascorbic acid, N-substituted alloxane, N-substituted barbituric acid, veronal, phenol or as a thiol group.
  • (4) Strongly (e.g., constitutively charged) anionic, pKa<4, net negative charge: on the basis of their chemical nature, these are functional groups such as sulfonate or phosphate esters.
  • The amphoteric liposomes contain variable amounts of such membrane-forming or membrane-based amphiphilic materials, so that they have an amphoteric character. This means that the liposomes can change the sign of the charge completely. The amount of charge carrier of a liposome, present at a given pH of the medium, can be calculated using the following formula:

  • z=Σni((qi−1)+10(pK−pH)/(1+10(pL−pH))
      • in which
      • qi is the absolute charge of the individual ionic groups below their pK (for example, carboxyl=0, simple nitrogen base=1, phosphate group of the second dissociation step=−1, etc.)
      • ni is the number of these groups in the liposome.
  • At the isoelectric point, the net charge of the liposome is 0. Structures with a largely selectable isoelectric point can be produced by mixing anionic and cationic portions.
  • In one embodiment, cationic components include DPIM, CHIM, DORIE, DDAB, DAC-Chol, TC-Chol, DOTMA, DOGS, (C18)2Gly+N,N-dioctadecylamido-glycine, CTAB, CPyC, DODAP DMTAP, DPTAP, DOTAP, DC-Chol, MoChol, HisChol and DOEPC. In another embodiment, cationic lipids include DMTAP, DPTAP, DOTAP, DC-Chol, MoChol and HisChol.
  • pH sensitive cationic lipids are disclosed in PCT International Publication Numbers WO 02/066490 as well as in and WO 03/070220, the contents of both of which are incorporated herein by reference.
  • pH sensitive cationic lipids can be compounds having the structure of the formula

  • L-X-spacer1-Y-spacer2-HET
      • wherein:
      • L is a sterol or [aliphatic(C(O)O)-]2alkyl-;
      • Sterol is selected from the group consisting of cholesterol, sitosterol, campesterol, desmosterol, fucosterol, 22-ketosterol, 20-hydroxysterol, sigmasterol, 22-hydroxycholesterol, 25 hydroxycholesterol, lanosterol, 7-dehydrocholesterol, dihydrocholesterol, 19-hydroxycholesterol, 5αcholest-7-en-3β-ol, 7-hydroxycholesterol, epicholesterol, ergosterol dehydroergosterol, and derivatives thereof;
      • Each spacer 1 and spacer 2 is independently an unsubstituted aliphatic;
      • Each X and Y is independently absent, —(C═O)—O—, —(C═O)—NH—, —(C═O)—S—, —O—, —NH—, —S—, —CH═N—, —O—(O═C)—, —S—(O═C)—, —NH—(O═C)—, ═CH—, —CH2—, ═N—O—. ═N—NH—, ═N—NH—(C═O)—, NH—SO2—, S(O)n—, S(O)2—NH— or —N═CH—; and
      • HET is an amino, an optionally substituted heterocycloaliphatic or an optionally substituted heteroaryl.
  • In some aspects, the HET is an optionally substituted heterocycloaliphatic including at least one nitrogen ring atom, or an optionally substituted heteroaryl including at least one nitrogen ring atom. In other aspects, the HET is morpholinyl, piperidinyl, piperazinlyl, pyrimidinyl or pyridinyl. In another aspect, the cationic lipid has the structure Sterol-X-spacer1-Y-spacer2-morpholinyl or Sterol-X-spacer1-Y-spacer2-imidazolyl. In still further aspects, the sterol is cholesterol.
  • In one embodiment, X is —O—, Spacer 1 and Spacer 2 are (CH2)2, Y is —(C═O)—NH—, and HET is morpholinyl. In another embodiment, X is ═CH—, Spacer 1 and Spacer 2 are (CH2)2, Y is —(C═O)—NH—, and HET is morpholinyl. In yet another embodiment, X is —CH2—, Spacer 1 and Spacer 2 are (CH2)2, Y is —(C═O)—NH—, and HET is morpholinyl. In still another embodiment, X is ═N—O—, Spacer 1 is —CH2—, Y is —(C═O)—NH—, Spacer 2 is (CH2)2 HET is morpholinyl. In still yet another embodiment, X is ═N—NH—, Spacer 1 is —CH2—, Y is —(C═O)—NH—, Spacer 2 is (CH2)2 and HET is morpholinyl. In a further embodiment, X is ═N—NH—(C═O)—, Spacer 1 is —CH2—, Y is —(C═O)—NH—, Spacer 2 is (CH2)2 and HET is morpholinyl. In still a further embodiment, X is —NH—(C═O)—, Spacer 1 is —CH2—, Y is —(C═O)—NH—, Spacer 2 is (CH2)2 and HET is morpholinyl. In an even further embodiment, X is —NH—, Spacer 1 and Spacer 2 are (CH2)2, Y is —(C═O)—NH—, and HET is morpholinyl. In another embodiment, X is —NH—(SO2)n—, Spacer 1 is —CH2—, Y is —(C═O)—NH—, Spacer 2 is (CH2)2 and HET is morpholinyl, wherein n is 1 or 2. In yet another embodiment, X is —S(O2)—NH—, Spacer 1 is —CH2—, Y is —(C═O)—NH—, Spacer 2 is (CH2)2 and HET is morpholinyl. The above compounds can be synthesized using syntheses of 1 or more steps, and can be prepared by one skilled in the art.
  • In another embodiment, pH sensitive cationic lipids can be compounds having the structure of the formula

  • L-X-spacer1-Y-spacer2-HET
      • wherein:
      • L is a structure according to the general formula
  • Figure US20150118291A1-20150430-C00004
      • wherein R1 and R2 are independently C8-C30 alkyl or acyl chains with 0, 1 or 2 ethylenically unsaturated bonds and M is absent, —O—(C═O); —NH—(C═O)—; —S—(C═O)—; —O—; —NH—; —S—; —N═CH—; —(O═C)—O—; —S—(O═C)—; —NH—(O═C)—; —N═CH— and/or —S—S—;
      • Sterol is selected from the group consisting of cholesterol, sitosterol, campesterol, desmosterol, fucosterol, 22-ketosterol, 20-hydroxysterol, sigmasterol, 22-hydroxycholesterol, 25 hydroxycholesterol, lanosterol, 7-dehydrocholesterol, dihydrocholesterol, 19-hydroxycholesterol, 5αcholest-7-en-3β-ol, 7-hydroxycholesterol, epicholesterol, ergosterol dehydroergosterol, and derivatives thereof;
      • Each spacer 1 and spacer 2 is independently an unsubstituted aliphatic with 1-8 carbon atoms;
      • X is absent and Y is absent, —(C═O)—O—; —(C═O)—NH—; —NH—(C═O)—O—; —O—; —NH—; —CH═N—; —O—(O═C)—; —S—; —(O═C)—; —NH—(O═C)—; —O—(O═C)—NH—, —N═CH— and/or —S—S—; and
      • HET is an amino, an optionally substituted heterocycloaliphatic or an optionally substituted heteroaryl.
  • In some aspects, the HET is an optionally substituted heterocycloaliphatic including at least one nitrogen ring atom, or an optionally substituted heteroaryl including at least one nitrogen ring atom. In other aspects, the HET is morpholinyl, piperidinyl, piperazinlyl, pyrimidinyl or pyridinyl. In another aspect, the cationic lipid has the structure Sterol-X-spacer1-Y-spacer2-morpholinyl or Sterol-X-spacer1-Y-spacer2-imidazolyl. In still further aspects, the sterol is cholesterol.
  • The amphoteric mixtures further comprise anionic lipids, either constitutively or conditionally charged in response to pH, and such lipids are also known to those skilled in the art. In one embodiment, lipids for use with the invention include DOGSucc, POGSucc, DMGSucc, DPGSucc, DMPS, DPPS, DOPS, POPS, DMPG, DPPG, DOPG, POPG, DMPA, DPPA, DOPA, POPA, CHEMS, CetylP, DGSucc, and combinations thereof.
  • 3. Neutral Lipids
  • Neutral lipids include any lipid that remains neutrally charged at a pH between about 4 and 9. Neutral lipids include, without limitation, cholesterol, other sterols and derivatives thereof, phospholipids, and combinations thereof and other neutral lipids. The phospholipids include any one phospholipid or combination of phospholipids capable of forming liposomes. They include phosphatidylcholines, phosphatidylethanolamines, lecithin and fractions thereof, phosphatidic acid, phosphatidylglycerols, phosphatidylinolitols, phosphatidylserines, plasmalogens and sphingomyelins. The phosphatidylcholines include, without limitation, those obtained from egg, soy beans or other plant sources or those that are partially or wholly synthetic or of variable lipid chain length and unsaturation, POPC, OPPC, natural or hydrogenated soy bean PC, natural or hydrogenated egg PC, DMPC, DPPC, DSPC, DOPC and derivatives thereof. In one embodiment, phosphatidylcholines are POPC, non-hydrogenated soy bean PC and non-hydrogenated egg PC. Phosphatidylethanolamines include, without limitation, DOPE, DMPE and DPPE and derivatives thereof. Phosphatidylglycerols include, without limitation, DMPG, DLPG, DPPG, and DSPG. Phosphatidic acids include, without limitation, DSPA, DMPA, DLPA and DPPA.
  • Sterols include cholesterol derivatives such as 3-hydroxy-5,6-cholestene and related analogs, such as 3-amino-5,6-cholestene and 5,6-cholestene, cholestane, cholestanol and related analogs, such as 3-hydroxy-cholestane; and charged cholesterol derivatives such as cholesteryl-beta-alanine and cholesterol hemisuccinate.
  • Other neutral lipids include α-tocopherols and derivatives, such as a-tocopherol acetate.
  • In another embodiment neutral lipids include without limitation, DOPE, POPC, soy bean PC or egg PC and cholesterol.
  • B. DNAi Oligonucleotides 1. Regulatory Regions of the bcl-2 Gene
  • The bcl-2 gene has two promoters designated P1 and P2. P1 from which most bcl-2 mRNA is transcribed is located approximately 1.4 kb upstream of the translation initiation site and P2 is 1.3 kb downstream of P1. (See Seto, M. et al. EMBO J. 7, 123-131 (1988).) P1 is GC-rich, lacks a TATA box, has many transcription start sites and includes seven consensus binding sites for the SP1 transcription factor. P2 includes a CCAAT box and a TATA box and has two different transcription initiation sites. There are multiple NF-κB recognition sites and an SV40 enhancer-like octamer motif within P2. (See Heckman, C. A., et al. Oncogene 21, 3898-3908 (2002).) (See SEQ ID NO:1254). Most human follicular lymphomas contain t(14; 18) chromosomal translocations that result from 3′-bcl-2 gene region breakpoints. (See Tsujimoto, Y. et al. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 84, 1329-1331 (1987).) These translocations place bcl-2 expression under control of the immunoglobulin heavy chain (IgH) locus enhancer resulting in upregulation of bcl-2 expression. Alternatively, there are 5′-bcl-2 breakpoint regions that result from fusions with either the IgH locus or two different immunoglobulin light chain (IgL) loci that are found in some DLCL lymphoma patient isolates. (See Yonetani, N. et al. Jpn. J. Cancer Res. 92, 933-940 (2001).) These 5′-bcl-2 breakpoints have been mapped in separate heterogeneous patient isolates to a region spanning 378 to 2312 by upstream of the translation initiation site. (See SEQ ID NOs:1255-1266.) Regions around the breakpoints may be sequences that can be used for bcl-2 DNAi oligonucleotide design.
  • The upstream regions of TGF-α, c-ki-ras, c-myc, c-erb-2 (Her-2), and c-Ha-ras can also be investigated to find regions to which DNAi oligonucleotides could bind based on preferred design criteria.
  • 2. DNAi Oligonucleotide Design
  • The DNAi oligonucleotides, in some embodiments, are DNA oligomers that are complementary to either the plus strand or minus strand of double stranded DNA. The DNAi oligonucleotide may hybridize to regulatory regions of the c-ki-ras, c-Ha-ras, c-myc, her-2, TGF-α, or bcl-2 gene. For the purposes of this invention, those upstream regions are defined as SEQ ID NO:1 (for her-2, or c-erb-2), SEQ ID NO:282 (for c-ki-ras), SEQ ID NO:462 (for c-Ha-ras), SEQ ID NO:936 (for c-myc), SEQ ID NO:1081 (for TGF-α) and SEQ ID NOs:1249 and 1254 (for bcl-2), provided that the DNAi oligonucleotide is a single stranded nucleic acid oligonucleotide or derivative thereof, whose sequence is complementary, in part, to a portion of the longest non-transcribed region of a gene in which the oligonucleotide affects indirectly or directly the expression, regulation or production of the same or different gene, wherein the longest non-transcribed region includes any portion of the gene that is not transcribed when the transcriptional start site is the site closest to the translation start site. DNAi oligonucleotides do not include RNAi and antisense oligonucleotides that base pair only with mRNAs or pre-mRNAs and interfere with RNA processing and/or message translation.
  • In some embodiments, the DNAi oligonucleotides may be designed based on certain design criteria. Such DNAi oligonucleotides can then be tested for efficacy using the methods disclosed herein. For example, in some embodiments, the DNAi oligonucleotides are methylated on at least one, two or all of the CpG islands. In other embodiments, the DNAi oligonucleotides contain no methylation. The present invention is not limited to a particular mechanism. Indeed, an understanding of the mechanism is not necessary to practice the present invention. Nonetheless, it is contemplated that DNAi oligonucleotides in some embodiments are those that have at least a 50% GC content and at least two GC dinucleotides. Also, in some embodiments, the DNAi oligonucleotides do not self hybridize. In further embodiments, the DNAi oligonucleotides are designed with at least 1 A or T to minimize self hybridization. In yet further embodiments, commercially available computer programs are used to survey the DNAi oligonucleotides for the ability to self hybridize. In still other embodiments, the DNAi oligonucleotides are at least 10, or 15 nucleotides and no more than 100 nucleotides in length. In further embodiments, DNAi oligonucleotides are 18-26 nucleotides in length. In some embodiments, DNAi oligonucleotides comprise the universal protein binding sequences CGCCC and CGCG or the complements thereof.
  • In some embodiments, the DNAi oligonucleotides hybridize to a regulatory region of a gene upstream from the TATA box of the promoter. In further embodiments, DNAi oligonucleotides are designed to hybridize to regulatory regions of an oncogene known to be bound by proteins (e.g., transcription factors). In some embodiments, the DNAi oligonucleotide compounds are not completely homologous to other regions of the human genome. The homology of the DNAi oligonucleotides to other regions of the genome can be determined using available search tools (e.g., BLAST, available at the internet site of NCBI).
  • The present invention is not limited to the specific DNAi oligonucleotide sequences described herein. Other suitable DNAi oligonucleotides may be identified (e.g., using the criteria described above or other criteria). Candidate DNAi oligonucleotides may be tested for efficacy using any suitable method. For example, candidate DNAi oligonucleotides can be evaluated for their ability to prevent cell proliferation at a variety of concentrations. In some embodiments, DNAi oligonucleotides inhibit gene expression or cell proliferation at a low concentration (e.g., less that 20 μM, or 10 μM in in vitro assays).
  • 3. DNAi Oligonucleotide Zones
  • In some embodiments, regions within the regulatory regions of the oncogenes are further defined as regions for hybridization of DNAi oligonucleotides. In some embodiments, these regions are referred to as “hot zones.”
  • In some embodiments, hot zones are defined based on DNAi oligonucleotide compounds that are demonstrated to be effective (see above section on DNAi oligonucleotides) and those that are contemplated to be effective based on the criteria for DNAi oligonucleotides described above. In further embodiments, hot zones encompass 10 by upstream and downstream of each compound included in each hot zone and have at least one CG or more within an increment of 40 by further upstream or downstream of each compound. In yet further embodiments, hot zones encompass a maximum of 100 bp upstream and downstream of each oligonucleotide compound included in the hot zone. In additional embodiments, hot zones are defined at beginning regions of each promoter. These hot zones are defined either based on effective sequence(s) or contemplated sequences and have a preferred maximum length of 200 bp. Based on the above described criteria, exemplary hot zones were designed. These hot zones are shown in Table 1.
  • TABLE 1
    Exemplary Hot Zones
    Gene Hot Zones
    Bcl-2 679-720, 930-1050, 1070-1280, 1420-1760
    c-erbB-2 205-344, 382-435
    c-K-ras 1-289, 432-658
    c-Ha-ras 21-220, 233-860, 1411-1530, 1631-1722
    c-myc 3-124, 165-629
    TGF-α 1-90, 175-219, 261-367, 431-930, 964-1237
  • 4. DNAi Oligomers
  • In one aspect, the DNAi oligonucleotides can be any DNAi oligomer that hybridizes under physiological conditions to the following sequences: SEQ ID NO:1, SEQ ID NO:282, SEQ ID NO:462, SEQ ID NO:936, SEQ ID NO:1081, SEQ ID NOs:1249 and/or 1254. In another aspect, the DNAi oligonucleotides can be any DNAi oligomer that hybridizes under physiological conditions to exemplary hot zones in SEQ ID NO:1, SEQ ID NO:282, SEQ ID NO:462, SEQ ID NO:936, SEQ ID NO:1081 and SEQ ID NO:1249. Examples of DNai oligomers include, without limitation, those DNAi oligomers listed in SEQ ID NOs 2-281, 283-461, 463-935, 937-1080, 1082-1248, 1250-1253 and 1267-1447 and the complements thereof. In another aspect, the DNAi oligonucleotides are SEQ ID NOs 2-22, 283-301, 463-503, 937-958, 1082-1109, 1250-1254 and 1270-1447 and the complements thereof. In an embodiment of these aspects, the DNAi oligonucleotides are from 15-35 base pairs in length.
  • For the bcl-2 gene, the DNAi oligomers can include any DNAi oligomer that hybridizes to SEQ ID NOs: 1249 or 1254. In another aspect, the DNAi oligomer can be any oligomer that hybridizes to nucleotides 500-2026, nucleotides 500-1525, nucleotides 800-1225, nucleotides 900-1125, nucleotides 950-1075 or nucleotides 970-1045 of SEQ ID NO:1249 or the complement thereof. In another aspect, the DNAi oligonucleotides can be any DNAi oligomer that hybridizes under physiological conditions to exemplary hot zones in SEQ ID NO:1249. Examples of DNAi oligomers include, without limitation, those DNai oligomers listed in SEQ ID NOs 1250-1253 and 1267-1447 and the complements thereof. In an embodiment of these aspects, the DNAi oligonucleotides are from 15-35 base pairs in length.
  • In another embodiment, the DNAi oligomer can be SEQ ID NO:1250, 1251, 1252, 1253, 1267-1447 or the complement thereof. In yet another embodiment, the DNAi oligomer can be SEQ ID NO:1250, 1251, 1267, 1268, 1276, 1277, 1285, 1286 or the complement thereof. In still another embodiment, the DNAi oligomer can be SEQ ID NOs 1250, 1251, 1289-1358 or the complements thereof. In an additional embodiment the DNAi oligomer can be SEQ ID NO:1250 or 1251.
  • In a further embodiment of these aspects, the DNAi oligomer has the sequence of the positive strand of the bcl-2 sequence, and thus, binds to the negative strand of the sequence.
  • In other aspects, the DNAi oligomers can include mixtures of DNAi oligonucleotides. For instance, the DNAi oligomer can include multiple DNAi oligonucleotides, each of which hybridizes to different parts of SEQ ID NOs 1249 and 1254. DNAi oligomers can hybridize to overlapping regions on those sequences or the DNAi oligomers may hybridize to non-overlapping regions. In other embodiments, DNAi oligomers can be SEQ ID NOs 1250, 1251, 1252, 1253, 1267-1447 or the complement thereof, wherein the mixture of DNAi oligomers comprises DNAi oligomers of at least 2 different sequences.
  • In other embodiments, the DNAi oligomer can include a mixture of DNAi oligomers, each of which hybridizes to a regulatory region of different genes. For instance, the DNAi oligomer can include a first DNAi oligomer that hybridizes to SEQ ID NO:1249 or 1254 and a second DNAi oligomer that hybridizes to a regulatory region of a second gene. In some embodiments, the DNAi oligomer includes a DNAi oligomer of SEQ ID NOs 1250-1254 or 1267-1447 or the complements thereof, and a DNAi oligomer that hybridizes to SEQ ID NO:1, SEQ ID NO:282, SEQ ID NO:462, SEQ ID NO:936, or SEQ ID NO:1081 or the complement thereof. In other embodiments, the DNAi oligomer includes SEQ ID NO 1250 or 1251 or the complement thereof and a DNAi oligomer that hybridizes to SEQ ID NO:1, SEQ ID NO:282, SEQ ID NO:462, SEQ ID NO:936, or SEQ ID NO:1081 or the complement thereof. In yet other embodiments, the DNAi oligomer includes SEQ ID NO:1250 or 1251 or the complement thereof and any of SEQ ID NOs 2-281, 283-461, 463-935, 937-1080 and 1082-1248, or the complement thereof.
  • In some embodiments, the present invention provides DNAi oligonucleotide therapeutics that are methylated at specific sites. The present invention is not limited to a particular mechanism. Indeed, an understanding of the mechanism is not necessary to practice the present invention. Nonetheless, it is contemplated that one mechanism for the regulation of gene activity is methylation of cytosine residues in DNA. 5-methylcytosine (5-MeC) is the only naturally occurring modified base detected in DNA (Ehrlick et al., Science 212:1350-1357 (1981)). Although not all genes are regulated by methylation, hypomethylation at specific sites or in specific regions in a number of genes is correlated with active transcription (Doerfler, Ann. Rev. Biochem. 52:93-124 [1984]; Christman, Curr. Top. Microbiol. Immunol. 108:49-78 [1988]; Cedar, Cell 34:5503-5513 [1988]). DNA methylation in vitro can prevent efficient transcription of genes in a cell-free system or transient expression of transfected genes. Methylation of C residues in some specific cis-regulatory regions can also block or enhance binding of transcriptional factors or repressors (Doerfler, supra; Christman, supra; Cedar, Cell 34:5503-5513 (1988); Tate et al., Curr. Opin. Genet. Dev. 3:225-231 [1993]; Christman et al., Virus Strategies, eds. Doerfler, W. & Bohm, P. (VCH, Weinheim, N.Y.) pp. 319-333 [1993]).
  • Disruption of normal patterns of DNA methylation has been linked to the development of cancer (Christman et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 92:7347-7351 [1995]). The 5-MeC content of DNA from tumors and tumor derived cell lines is generally lower than normal tissues (Jones et al., Adv. Cancer Res 40:1-30 [1983]). Hypomethylation of specific oncogenes such as c-myc, c-Ki-ras and c-Ha-ras has been detected in a variety of human and animal tumors (Nambu et al., Jpn. J. Cancer (Gann) 78:696-704 [1987]; Feinberg et al., Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. 111:47-54 [1983]; Cheah et al., JNCI73:1057-1063 [1984]; Bhave et al., Carcinogenesis (Lond) 9:343-348 [1988]. In one of the best studied examples of human tumor progression, it has been shown that hypomethylation of DNA is an early event in development of colon cancer (Goetz et al., Science 228:187-290 [1985]). Interference with methylation in vivo can lead to tumor formation. Feeding of methylation inhibitors such as L-methionine or 5-azacytodine or severe deficiency of 5-adenosine methionine through feeding of a diet depleted of lipotropes has been reported to induce formation of liver tumors in rats (Wainfan et al., Cancer Res. 52:2071s-2077s [1992]). Studies show that extreme lipotrope deficient diets can cause loss of methyl groups at specific sites in genes such as c-myc, ras and c-fos (Dizik et al., Carcinogenesis 12:1307-1312 [1991]). Hypomethylation occurs despite the presence of elevated levels of DNA MTase activity (Wainfan et al., Cancer Res. 49:4094-4097 [1989]). Genes required for sustained active proliferation become inactive as methylated during differentiation and tissue specific genes become hypomethylated and are active. Hypomethylation can then shift the balance between the two states. In some embodiments, taking advantage of this naturally occurring phenomena, the mixture of the present invention may be adapted for site specific methylation of specific gene promoters, thereby preventing transcription and hence translation of certain genes. In other embodiments, the mixture of the present invention may be adapted for upregulating the expression of a gene of interest (e.g., a tumor suppressor gene) by altering the gene's methylation patterns.
  • The present invention is not limited to the use of methylated DNAi oligonucleotides. Indeed, the use of non-methylated DNAi oligonucleotides for the inhibition of gene expression is specifically contemplated by the present invention.
  • The DNAi oligonucleotides can be in a naturally occurring state, and can also contain modifications or substitutions in the nucleobases, the sugar moiety and/or in the internucleoside linkage.
  • Nucleobases comprise naturally occurring nucleobases as well as non-naturally occurring nucleobases. Illustrative examples of such nucleobases include without limitation adenine, cytosine, 5-methylcytosine, isocytosine, pseudoisocytosine, guanine, thymine, uracil, 5-bromouracil, 5-propynyluracil, 5-propynylcytosine, 5-propyny-6-fluoroluracil, 5-methylthiazoleuracil, 6-aminopurine, 2-aminopurine, inosine, diaminopurine, 7-deazaguanine, 7-deazaadenine, 3-deazaguanine, 3-deazaadenine, 8-azaguanine, 8-azaadenine, 7-propyne-7-deazaadenine, 7-propyne-7-deazaguanine, 2-chloro-6-aminopurine, 4-acetylcytosine, 5-hydroxymethylcytosine, 8-hydroxy-N6-methyladenosine, aziridinylcytosine, 5-(carboxyhydroxyl-methyl) uracil, 5-fluorouracil, 5-carboxymethylaminomethyl-2-thiouracil, 5-carboxymethylaminomethyluracil, dihydrouracil, N6-isopentenyladenine, 1-methyladenine, 1-methylpseudouracil, 1-methylguanine, 1-methylinosine, 2,2-dimethylguanine, 2-methyladenine, 2-methylguanine, 3-methylcytosine, N6-methyladenine, 7-methylguanine and other alkyl derivatives of adenine and guanine, 2-propyl adenine and other alkyl derivatives of adenine and guanine, 2-aminoadenine, 5-methylaminomethyluracil, 5-methoxyaminomethyl-2-thiouracil, beta-D-mannosylqueosine, 5′-methoxycarbonylmethyluracil, 5-methoxyuracil, 2-methylthio-N6-isopentenyladenine, uracil-5-oxyacetic acid methylester, uracil-5-oxyacetic acid, oxybutoxosine, pseudouracil, queosine, 2-thiocytosine, 2-thiothymine, 5-halouracil, 5-halocytosine, 6-azo uracil, cytosine and thymine, 5-methyl-2-thiouracil, 2-thiouracil, 4-thiouracil, 5-methyluracil, 8-halo, 8-amino, 8-thiol, 8-hydroxyl and other 8-substituted adenines and guanines, 5-trifluoromethyl uracil and cytosine, N-uracil-5-oxyacetic acid methylester, uracil-5-oxyacetic acid, queosine, xanthine, hypoxanthine, 2-thiocytosine, 2,6-diaminopurine, 5-substituted pyrimidines, 6-azapyrimidines and N-2, N-6 and 0-6 substituted purines, including 2-aminopropyladenine, 5-propynyluracil and 5-propynylcytosine.
  • The DNAi oligonucleotides can also have sugars other than ribose and deoxy ribose, including arabinofuranose (described in International Publication number WO 99/67378, which is herein incorporated by reference), xyloarabinofuranose (described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,316,612 and 6,489,465, which are herein incorporated by reference), α-threofuranose (Schöning, et al. (2000) Science, 290, 1347-51, which is herein incorporated by reference) and L-ribofuranose. Sugar mimetics can replace the sugar in the nucleotides. They include cyclohexene (Wang et al. (2000) J. Am. Chem. Soc. 122, 8595-8602; Vebeure et al. Nucl. Acids Res. (2001) 29, 4941-4947, which are herein incorporated by reference), a tricyclo group (Steffens, et al. J. Am. Chem. Soc. (1997) 119, 11548-11549, which is herein incorporated by reference), a cyclobutyl group, a hexitol group (Maurinsh, et al. (1997) J. Org. Chem, 62, 2861-71; J. Am. Chem. Soc. (1998) 120, 5381-94, which are herein incorporated by reference), an altritol group (Allart, et al., Tetrahedron (1999) 6527-46, which is herein incorporated by reference), a pyrrolidine group (Scharer, et al., J. Am. Chem. Soc., 117, 6623-24, which is herein incorporated by reference), carbocyclic groups obtained by replacing the oxygen of the furnaose ring with a methylene group (Froehler and Ricca, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 114, 8230-32, which is herein incorporated by reference) or with an S to obtain 4′-thiofuranose (Hancock, et al., Nucl. Acids Res. 21, 3485-91, which is herein incorporated by reference), and/or morpholino group (Heasman, (2002) Dev. Biol., 243, 209-214, which is herein incorporated by reference) in place of the pentofuranosyl sugar. Morpholino oligonucleotides are commercially available from Gene Tools, LLC (Corvallis Oreg., USA).
  • The DNAi oligonucleotides can also include “locked nucleic acids” or LNAs. The LNAs can be bicyclic, tricyclic or polycyclic. LNAs include a number of different monomers, one of which is depicted in Formula I.
  • Figure US20150118291A1-20150430-C00005
      • wherein
      • B constitutes a nucleobase;
      • Z* is selected from an internucleoside linkage and a terminal group;
      • Z is selected from a bond to the internucleoside linkage of a preceding nucleotide/nucleoside and a terminal group, provided that only one of Z and Z* can be a terminal group;
      • X and Y are independently selected from —O—, —S—, —N(H)—, —N(R)—, —CH2— or —C(H)═, CH2—O—, —CH2—S—, —CH2—N(H)—, —CH2—N(R)—, —CH2—CH2— or —CH2—C(H)=, —CH═CH—;
      • provided that X and Y are not both O.
  • In addition to the LNA [2′-Y,4′-C-methylene-β-D-ribofuranosyl]monomers depicted in formula XVIII (a[2,2,1]bicyclo nucleoside), an LNA or LNA* nucleotide can also include “locked nucleic acids” with other furanose or other 5 or 6-membered rings and/or with a different monomer formulation, including 2′-Y,3′ linked and 3′-Y,4′ linked, 1′-Y,3 linked, 1′-Y,4′ linked, 3′-Y,5′ linked, 2′-Y, 5′ linked, 1′-Y,2′ linked bicyclonucleosides and others. All the above mentioned LNAs can be obtained with different chiral centers, resulting, for example, in LNA [3′-Y-4′-C-methylene (or ethylene)-β (or α)-arabino-, xylo- or L-ribo-furanosyl]monomers. LNA oligonucleotides and LNA nucleotides are generally described in International Publication No. WO 99/14226 and subsequent applications; International Publication Nos. WO 00/56746, WO 00/56748, WO 00/66604, WO 01/25248, WO 02/28875, WO 02/094250, WO 03/006475; U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,043,060, 6,268,490, 6,770,748, 6,639,051, and U.S. Publication Nos. 2002/0125241, 2003/0105309, 2003/0125241, 2002/0147332, 2004/0244840 and 2005/0203042, all of which are incorporated herein by reference. LNA oligonucleotides and LNA analogue oligonucleotides are commercially available from, for example, Proligo LLC 6200 Lookout Road, Boulder, Colo. 80301 USA.
  • The nucleotide derivatives of the DNAi oligonucleotides can include nucleotides containing one of the following at the 2′ sugar position: OH; F; O-, S-, or N-alkyl; O-, S-, or N-alkenyl; O-, S- or N-alkynyl; or O-alkyl-O-alkyl, wherein the alkyl, alkenyl and alkynyl may be substituted or unsubstituted C1 to C10 alkyl or C2 to C10 alkenyl and alkynyl, O[(CH2)nO]mCH3, O(CH2)nOCH3, O(CH2)nNH2, O(CH2)nCH3, O(CH2)nONH2, and O(CH2)nON[(CH2)nCH3)]2, where n and m are from 1 to about 10, C1 to C10 lower alkyl, substituted lower alkyl, alkaryl, aralkyl, O-alkaryl or O-aralkyl, SH, SCH3, OCN, Cl, Br, CN, CF3, OCF3, SOCH3, SO2CH3, ONO2, NO2, N3, NH2, heterocycloalkyl, heterocycloalkaryl, aminoalkylamino, polyalkylamino, substituted silyl, 2′-methoxyethoxy(2′-O—CH2CH2OCH3, also known as 2′-O-(2-methoxyethyl) or 2′-MOE) (Martin et al., Helv. Chim. Acta 78:486 [1995]) i.e., an alkoxyalkoxy group, 2′-dimethylaminooxyethoxy (i.e., an O(CH2)2ON(CH3)2 group), also known as 2′-DMAOE, and 2′-dimethylaminoethoxyethoxy (also known in the art as 2′-O-dimethylaminoethoxyethyl or 2′-DMAEOE), i.e., 2′-O—CH2—O—CH2—N(CH2)2, 2′-methoxy(2′-O—CH3), 2′-aminopropoxy(2′-OCH2CH2CH2NH2) and 2′-fluoro (2′-F). Similar modifications may also be made at other positions on the DNAi oligonucleotide, particularly the 3′ position of the sugar on the 3′ terminal nucleotide or in 2′-5′ linked DNAi oligonucleotides and the 5′ position of 5′ terminal nucleotide.
  • In some embodiments, the DNAi oligonucleotides have non-natural internucleoside linkages. As defined in this specification, oligonucleotides having modified backbones include those that retain a phosphorus atom in the backbone and those that do not have a phosphorus atom in the backbone. For the purposes of this specification, modified oligonucleotides that do not have a phosphorus atom in their internucleoside backbone can also be considered to be oligonucleosides.
  • Some modified DNAi oligonucleotide backbones include, for example, phosphorothioates, chiral phosphorothioates, phosphorodithioates, phosphoroselenates, phosphotriesters, aminoalkylphosphotriesters, methyl and other alkyl phosphonates including 3′-alkylene phosphonates and chiral phosphonates, phosphinates, phosphoramidates including 3′-amino phosphoramidate and aminoalkylphosphoramidates, thionophosphoramidates, thionoalkylphosphonates, thionoalkylphosphotriesters, and boranophosphates having normal 3′-5′ linkages, 2′-5′ linked analogs of these, and those having inverted polarity wherein the adjacent pairs of nucleoside units are linked 3′-5′ to 5′-3′ or 2′-5′ to 5′-2′. Various salts, mixed salts and free acid forms are also included.
  • Other modified DNAi oligonucleotide backbones that do not include a phosphorus atom therein have backbones that are formed by short chain alkyl or cycloalkyl internucleoside linkages, mixed heteroatom and alkyl or cycloalkyl internucleoside linkages, or one or more short chain heteroatomic or heterocyclic internucleoside linkages. These include those having morpholino linkages (formed in part from the sugar portion of a nucleoside); siloxane backbones; sulfide, sulfoxide and sulfone backbones; formacetyl and thioformacetyl backbones; methylene formacetyl and thioformacetyl backbones; alkene containing backbones; sulfamate backbones; methyleneimino and methylenehydrazino backbones; sulfonate and sulfonamide backbones; amide backbones; and others having mixed N, O, S and CH2 component parts.
  • In yet other DNAi oligonucleotide mimetics, both the sugar and the internucleoside linkage (i.e., the backbone) of the nucleotide units are replaced with novel groups. The base units are maintained for hybridization with an appropriate nucleic acid target compound. One such oligomeric compound, an oligonucleotide mimetic that has been shown to have excellent hybridization properties, is referred to as a peptide nucleic acid (PNA). In PNA compounds, the sugar-backbone of an oligonucleotide is replaced with an amide containing backbone, in particular an aminoethylglycine backbone. The nucleobases are retained and are bound directly or indirectly to aza nitrogen atoms of the amide portion of the backbone. Representative patents that teach the preparation of PNA compounds include, but are not limited to, U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,539,082; 5,714,331; and 5,719,262, each of which is herein incorporated by reference. Further teaching of PNA compounds can be found in Nielsen et al., Science 254:1497 (1991).
  • In some embodiments, DMAi oligonucleotides of the invention are oligonucleotides with phosphorothioate backbones and oligonucleosides with heteroatom backbones, and in particular —CH2—, —NH—O—CH2—, —CH2—N(CH3)—O—CH2— [known as a methylene (methylimino) or MMI backbone], —CH2—O—N(CH3)—CH2—, —CH2—N(CH3)—N(CH3)—CH2—, and —O—N(CH3)—CH2—CH2— [wherein the native phosphodiester backbone is represented as —O—P—O—CH2-] of the above referenced U.S. Pat. No. 5,489,677, and the amide backbones of the above referenced U.S. Pat. No. 5,602,240. Oligonucleotides can also have a morpholino backbone structure of the above-referenced U.S. Pat. No. 5,034,506.
  • In some embodiments the DNAi oligonucleotides have a phosphorothioate backbone having the following general structure.
  • Figure US20150118291A1-20150430-C00006
  • Another modification of the DNAi oligonucleotides of the present invention involves adding additional nucleotides to the 3′ and/or 5′ ends of the DNAi oligonucleotides. The 3′ and 5′ tails can comprise any nucleotide and can be as short as one nucleotide and as long as 20 nucleotides.
  • Yet another modification of the DNAi oligonucleotides of the present invention involves chemically linking to the oligonucleotide one or more moieties or conjugates that enhance the activity, cellular distribution or cellular uptake of the oligonucleotide. Such moieties include but are not limited to lipid moieties such as a cholesterol moiety, cholic acid, a thioether, (e.g., hexyl-S-tritylthiol), a thiocholesterol, an aliphatic chain, (e.g., dodecandiol or undecyl residues), a phospholipid, (e.g., di-hexadecyl-rac-glycerol or triethylammonium 1,2-di-O-hexadecyl-rac-glycero-3-H-phosphonate), a polyamine or a polyethylene glycol chain or adamantane acetic acid, a palmityl moiety, or an octadecylamine or hexylamino-carbonyl-oxycholesterol moiety.
  • One skilled in the relevant art knows well how to generate oligonucleotides containing the above-described modifications. The present invention is not limited to the DNAi oligonucleotides described above. Any suitable modification or substitution may be utilized, provided that the DNAi oligonucleotide is a single stranded nucleic acid oligonucleotide or derivative thereof, whose sequence is complementary, in part, to a portion of the longest non-transcribed region of a gene in which the oligonucleotide affects indirectly or directly the expression, regulation or production of the same or different gene, wherein the longest non-transcribed region includes any portion of the gene that is not transcribed when the transcriptional start site is the site closest to the translation start site. DNAi oligonucleotides do not include RNAi and antisense oligonucleotides that base pair only with mRNAs or pre-mRNAs and interfere with RNA processing and/or message translation.
  • It is not necessary for all positions in a given compound to be uniformly modified, and in fact more than one of the aforementioned modifications may be incorporated in a single compound or even at a single nucleoside within a DNAi oligonucleotide. The present invention also includes pharmaceutical compositions and formulations that include the DNAi oligonucleotide compounds of the present invention as described below.
  • 5. Preparation and Formulation of DNAi Oligonucleotides
  • Any of the known methods of oligonucleotide synthesis can be used to prepare the modified DNAi oligomers of the present invention. In some embodiments utilizing methylated DNAi oligonucleotides the nucleotide, dC is replaced by 5-methyl-dC where appropriate, as taught by the present invention. The modified or unmodified DNAi oligonucleotides of the present invention are most conveniently prepared by using any of the commercially available automated nucleic acid synthesizers. They can also be obtained from commercial sources that synthesize custom oligonucleotides pursuant to customer specifications.
  • In additional embodiments, chemotherapeutic agents, including docetaxel and others can be combined with DNAi oligomers before or while sequestering in liposomes.
  • C. Amphoteric Liposome Formulations
  • 1. Description
  • Advantageously, the amphoteric liposome formulations of the mixture of the present invention (1) exhibit low toxicity; (2) can sequester high concentrations of DNAi oligomers e.g., the efficiency of sequestering the DNAi oligonucleotides associated with the amphoteric liposomes is at least about 35%; (3) are stable in the bloodstream, such as when administered systemically, such that the oligonucleotide and/or other agents are stably sequestered in the liposomes until eventual uptake in the target tissue or cells; (4) can be optimized for delivery to animals, such as by adjusting the concentration of sequestered DNAi oligonucleotide to between about 1 to 4 mg/ml (such as about 2 mg/ml) for a lipid concentration of about 10 to 100 mM or less which provides dosing at 10 mg/kg in 200 μl of injection volume; and (5) can be produced with an average amphoteric liposome size that is smaller than 200 ηm, such as about 100 ηm, which maximizes tumor penetration.
  • As described above, the amphoteric liposomes include one or more DNAi oligonucleotides, one or more amphoteric lipids or a mixture of anionic and cationic lipid components with amphoteric properties and one or more neutral lipids.
  • In general, cationic lipids or positive charges on the amphoteric lipids act to bind DNAi oligonucleotides. Anionic lipids, such as CHEMS, or anionic charges on amphoteric lipids and neutral lipids, such as phosphatidylethanolamines allow for the fusogenic properties of the amphoteric liposomes.
  • In some embodiments of the present invention, the amphoteric liposomes can be formed from a lipid phase comprising an amphoteric lipid. The lipid phase can comprise 5 to 30 mole % or 10 to 25 mole % of the amphoteric lipid. Alternatively, the amphoteric liposomes can be formed from a lipid phase comprising a mixture of lipid components with amphoteric properties. The total amount of charged lipids may vary from 5 to 95 mole %, from 20 to 80 mole % or from 30 to 70 mole % of the lipid mixture.
  • The ratio of the percent of cationic lipids to anionic lipids can be between about 3 and 0.5 or between about 2 to 0.5. In some embodiments, the ratio of cationic lipids to anionic lipids is about 2. In other embodiments, the ratio of cationic lipids to anionic lipids is about 1. In other embodiments, the ratio of cationic lipids to anionic lipids is about 0.5.
  • Specific pairs of cationic and anionic lipids include, without limitation, MoChol and CHEMS, DOTAP and CHEMS, MoChol and Cet-P, and MoChol and DMGSucc. Examples of charged lipid pairs further include, without limitation, between about 10 to 60 mole % of MoChol and between about 10 to 30 mole % of CHEMS; between about 5 to 30 mole % of DOTAP and between about 10 to 30 mole % of CHEMS; between about 10 to 40 mole % MoChol and between about 5 to 30 mole % Cet-P; and between about 20 to 60 mole % MoChol and between about 20 to 60 mole % DMGSucc.
  • The amphoteric liposomes also contain neutral lipids, which can be either sterols or phospholipids, and mixtures thereof. The amphoteric liposomes include neutral lipids in an amount between about 5 to 95 mole % of the lipid mixture, between about 20 to 80 mole %, or between 30 and 70 mole %.
  • A number of neutral lipid combinations are useful in forming the amphoteric liposomes, such as POPC and DOPE; and POPC and cholesterol. In contrast, a combination of the neutral lipids DOPE and cholesterol is not preferred. In some embodiments, the mixture of neutral lipids includes 5 to 40 mole % POPC and 20 to 50 mole % DOPE; or 10 to 50 mole % of POPC and 30 to 50 mole % of cholesterol. The ratio of the percentage of charged lipids to neutral lipids can be between about 3 and 0.2. In some embodiments, the ratio of the percentage of charged lipids to neutral lipids is about 2. In other embodiments, the ratio of the percentage of charged lipids to neutral lipids is about 0.5.
  • Examples of specific combinations of charged and neutral lipids for sequestering an DNAi oligomer, such as PNT-100 (SEQ ID NO:1251), include POPC, DOPE, MoChol and CHEMS; POPC, DOPE, DMGSucc and MoChol; POPC, DOTAP, CHEMS and cholesterol; and POPC, MoChol, Cet-P and cholesterol. In some embodiments, the amphoteric liposome for sequestering a DNAi oligomer, such as SEQ ID NO:1251, includes 3-20 mole % of POPC, 10 to 60 mole % of DOPE, 10 to 60 mole % of MoChol and 10 to 60 mole % of CHEMS. The amphoteric liposome may include POPC/DOPE/MoChol/CHEMS in molar ratios of about 6/24/47/23 and about 15/45/20/20. In another embodiment, the amphoteric liposomes include 3-20 mole % of POPC, 10 to 40 mole % of DOPE, 15 to 60 mole % of MoChol and 15 to 60 mole % of DMGSucc. The amphoteric liposome can include POPC/DOPE/DMGSucc/MoChol in molar ratios of about 6/24/23/47 and about 6/24/47/23. In still another embodiment, the amphoteric liposome includes 10 to 50 mole % of POPC, 20 to 60 mole % of Chol, 10 to 40 mole % of CHEMS and 5 to 20 mole % of DOTAP. The amphoteric liposome can include POPC/Chol/CHEMS/DOTAP in a molar ratio of about 30/40/20/10. In still another embodiment, the amphoteric liposome includes 10 to 40 mole % of POPC, 20 to 50 mole % of Chol, 5 to 30 mole % of Cet-P and 10 to 40 mole % of MoChol. The amphoteric liposome can include POPC/Chol/Cet-P/MoChol in a molar ratio of about 35/35/10/20.
  • In general, any Amphoter I, II, or III lipid pair of cationic and anionic lipids together with neutral lipids can be used to form liposomes provided that the resulting liposome is amphoteric, exhibits serum stability, has low toxicity, sequesters an ample quantity of the DNAi oligonucleotides, e.g., at an efficiency of about 35%, (about 5%, 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35% or higher) and provides for an adjustment of the DNAi oligonucleotide concentration to at least 2 mg/ml for a lipid concentration of 100 mM or less.
  • 2. Preparation of the Amphoteric Liposomes
  • DNAi-amphoteric liposomes of the invention can be prepared by standard methods for preparing and sizing liposomes known to those skilled in the art. These include hydration of lipid films and powders, solvent injection and reverse-phase evaporation. Often multilamellar vesicles will form spontaneously when amphiphilic lipids are hydrated, whereas the formation of small unilamellar vesicles usually requires a process involving substantial energy input, such as ultrasonication, high pressure homogenization, injection of lipid solutions in ethanol into a water phase containing the DNAi oligonucleotides to be sequestered and/or extrusion through filters or membranes of defined pore size. Methods for preparing and characterizing liposomes have been described, for example, by S. Vemuri et al. (Preparation and characterization of liposomes as therapeutic delivery systems: a review. Pharm Acta Helv. 1995, 70(2):95-111).
  • A solution of the DNAi oligonucleotide may be contacted with an excipient at a neutral pH, thereby resulting in a passive loading procedure of a certain percentage of the solution. The use of high concentrations of the excipient, ranging from about 50 mM to about 150 mM, is one method to achieve substantial encapsulation of the active agent. Excipients include substances that can initiate or facilitate loading of DNAi oligonucleotides. Examples of excipients include, without limitation, acid, sodium or ammonium forms of monovalent aniond such as chloride, acetate, lactobionate and formate; divalent anions such as aspartate, succinate and sulfate; and trivalent ions such as citrate and phosphate.
  • Amphoteric liposomes used with the present invention offer the distinct advantage of binding oligonucleotides at or below their isoelectric point, thereby concentrating the active agent at the liposome surface. The advanced loading procedure is described in more detail in PCT International Publication Number WO02/066012.
  • To form unilammellar liposomes, a shearing force is applied to the aqueous dispersion of the DNAi-oligonucleotide lipid mixture. The shearing force can be applied by sonication, using a microfluidizing apparatus such as a homogenizer or French press, injection, freezing and thawing, dialyzing away a detergent solution from lipids, ultrafiltration, extrusion through filters, or other known methods used to prepare liposomes. The size of the liposomes can be controlled using a variety of known techniques, including the duration of shearing force.
  • Unentrapped DNAi oligomers can be removed from the amphoteric liposome dispersion by buffer exchange using dialysis, size exclusion chromatography (e.g., Sephadex G-50 resin), ultrafiltration (100,000-300,000 molecular weight cutoff), or centrifugation.
  • In one embodiment, DNAi oligonucleotide loaded amphoteric liposomes may be manufactured by a machine extrusion. Once the lipids are mixed with the oligonucleotides, they may be extruded using machine extrusion, where the machine is described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,843,942 and US Patent Application No. 2004/0032037. The liposomes are loaded and filtered so that the diameter of the liposome is between 50 ηm and 200 ηm, the encapsulation efficiency of the oligonucleotide is at least about 35% and the resulting liposomes have a DNAi oligonucleotide concentration of at least 2 mg/ml at a lipid concentration of 10 to 100 mM or less.
  • VII. Treating Animals or Cells with Amphoteric Liposomes Sequestering DNAi Oligomers
  • The compositions of the invention are useful for treating animals, including humans, or cells to treat cancer, such as by inhibiting or reducing tumor growth. The animal can be a non-human animal, including mice, horses, cats, dogs, or other animals or it can be a human. In one embodiment, the mixture is introduced to the animal at a dosage of between 1 mg to 100 mg/kg of body weight. In another embodiment, the amphoteric liposomes can be introduced to the animal one or more times per day or continuously.
  • The mixture can be administered to the animal via different routes. Administration can be topical (including ophthalmic and to mucous membranes including vaginal and rectal delivery), pulmonary (e.g., by inhalation or insufflation of powders or aerosols, including by nebulizer; intratracheal, intranasal, epidermal and transdermal), oral or parenteral. Parenteral administration includes intravenous, intraarterial, subcutaneous, intraperitoneal or intramuscular injection or infusion; or intracranial, e.g., intrathecal or intraventricular, administration. Administration can also be via a medical device.
  • The liposomes can be administered to cultured cells derived from various cancers, including pancreatic cancer, colon cancer, breast cancer, bladder cancer, lung cancer, leukemia, prostate cancer, lymphoma, ovarian cancer or melanoma.
  • The liposomes can be used to target DNAi oligonucleotides to selected tissues using several techniques. The procedures involve manipulating the size of the liposomes, their net surface charge as well as the route of administration. More specific manipulations include labeling the liposomes with receptor ligands, including membrane and nuclear receptor ligands or antibodies for specific tissues or cells. Antibodies or ligands can be bound to the surface of the liposomes.
  • The invention will be further described in the following examples, which do not limit the scope of the invention described in the claims.
  • EXAMPLES Example 1 Materials
  • The synthesis of MoChol and HisChol were described in US Patent Application No. 2004/0131666 (WO 02/066490). The other lipids are available from commercial sources. For example, DOTAP and Cholesterol are available from Merck, DMG-Succ is available from Chiroblock GmbH, CHEMS can be obtained from Sigma Chemical Company, DPPG, DOPE and POPC are available from Genzyme or Lipoid GMBH and Egg phosphatidylcholine is available from Lipoid GMBH.
  • Example 2 Production of Amphoteric Liposomes Charged with DNAi Oligonucleotides
  • The lipid composition of the liposomes as well as the methods of preparing them are chosen so that the encapsulation efficiency is about 35% or higher and the liposome size is smaller than 200 ηm, and optimally near 100-120 ηm to maximize tumor penetration. For administering to animals, the DNAi oligonucleotide concentration is preferably at least 2 mg/ml at a lipid concentration of 100 mM or less. This allows dosing at 10 mg/kg in 200 μl of injection volume.
  • Liposomes are produced by a modified lipid film/hydration/extrusion method. Lipids are dissolved in chloroform or chloroform/methanol and dried completely in a rotary evaporator. The lipid films are next hydrated with various amounts of the DNAi oligonucleotides SEQ ID NO:1251 (PNT100) or the complement of PNT-100 (PNT-100R) hydrated in buffer.
  • A. Advanced Loading Procedure
  • 2400 μmole of lipid is hydrated with 10 mM NaOAc, 150 mM NaCl (pH adjusted using citrate) containing 48.8 to 95.2 mg of DNAi oligonucleotides for 30 min. at 40° C. After three freeze-thaw steps, the resulting multilamellar vesicles is passed several times through a polycarbonate membrane (100 ηm pore size) using high pressure pumps. Immediately after the extrusion step, the pH of the liposome suspension is shifted to pH 7.5. The resulting suspension is sedimented at 25s using T865 (Sorvall Ultra Pro80) or TLA 100.4 rotors (Beckman Optima-MAX) to remove unsequestered DNAi oligonucleotide and to exchange the buffer with phosphate buffered saline (PBS).
  • B. Passive Loading Procedure
  • The lipid film is hydrated with PBS containing 405 mg of DNAi oligonucleotides for 1 hr at 40° C. at a final lipid concentration of 100 mM. After three freeze-thaw steps, the resulting vesicles are extruded through a polycarbonate membrane stack containing different pore sizes between 100 and 800 nm. The resulting suspension is sedimented three times at 25 s. (PBS is Phosphate Buffered Saline, which has the formula: 10.1 mM Na2PO4, 1.76 mM KH2PO4, 137 mM NaCl, 2.68 mM KCl, pH 7.5.)
  • C. Machine Extrusion
  • The vesicles are prepared by either the passive or advanced loading procedure and extruded using a device for producing lipid vesicle.
  • Particle properties were measured using a Zetasizer 3000 HAS (Malvern). Liposomes were diluted in appropriate buffer to a final lipid concentration of 0.2-0.6 mM. Size values are recorded as Z average and size distribution was calculated in the Multimodal mode. For Zeta potential measurement, liposomes were also diluted to 0.2-0.6 mM concentration.
  • TABLE 2
    Liposome Formulations
    Formulation Composition Molar Ratios
    A POPC/DOPE/MoChol/CHEMS 15/45/20/20
    B POPC/DOTAP/CHEMS/Chol 30/10/20/40
    C POPC/MoChol/Cet-P/Chol 35/20/10/35
    D POPC/DOPE/MoChol/CHEMS  6/24/47/23
    E POPC/DOPE/MoChol/DMG-Succ  6/24/47/23
    F POPC/DOPE/MoChol/DMG-Succ  6/24/23/47
  • For all formulations in Table 2, active loading using either manual or machine extrusion in general gave better results. The encapsulation efficiencies ranged from 37-77%, liposome size ranged from 124-201 ηm and the DNAi oligonucleotide concentration at a lipid concentration of 100 mM ranged from 1.1 to 3.5 mg/ml. Machine extrusion gave similar results as manual extrusion with the possible exception that machine extrusion resulted in more uniform liposome size, ranging from 135-179 ηm. Machine extrusion is preferred for larger volumes.
  • The passive loading procedure resulted in lower encapsulation efficiencies, ranging from 11-21%. However, liposome size ranged from 122-182 nm and the oligonucleotide concentration at a lipid concentration of 100 mM ranged from 2.0-3.7 mg/ml. All formulations that were passively loaded were manually extruded because attempts at machine extrusion created a high back pressure.
  • The advanced loading procedure could not be used for all formulations because of the low loading capacity of formulations that contain less than 20% cationic lipid. Consequently, formulation B with DOTAP at 10%, could not be loaded efficiently by the advanced loading procedure, and the passive loading procedure was used.
  • A ratio of cationic lipid charge to anionic nucleotide charge at low pH (N/P) of 3.3 was found to be the best compromise to produce small particles, high encapsulation efficiency and DNAi oligonucleotide concentration to lipid concentration of at least 2.0 mg/ml of DNAi oligonucleotide at 10 to 100 mM lipid concentration.
  • D. Preparation of PNT 2254 and PNT 2253
  • Liposomes are produced with a modified ethanol injection method. Briefly, 3 volumes of ethanol, containing the lipid mixture D (POPC/DOPE/MoChol/Chems 6:24:47:23) (133 mM, heated to 55° C.) and 8 volumes of 20 mM NaAc/300 mM Sucrose/pH 4, containing 2.71 mg/ml PNT100 (SEQ ID NO:1251) or PNT100-R (SEQ ID NO: 1288) in case of PNT2254 or PNT2254R production, or containing 1.36 mg/ml PNT100 in case of PNT2253 production, were continuously mixed using an injection device as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 6,843,942 and US patent application No. 2004/0032037. The acidic mixture was shifted to pH 7.5 by an additional continuous mixing step with 32 volumes of 100 mM NaCl/136 mM Phosphate/pH 9. The resulting liposomal suspension was concentrated 10 fold and dialyzed against PBS, pH 7.4 to wash out non encapsulated PNT100 or PNT100-R and excess ethanol.
  • Example 3 Serum Resistance of and Leakage of DNAi Oligonucleotides from Amphoteric Liposomes
  • The lipid ratios can be optimized for both stability of the liposomes in serum and minimal leakage of the DNAi oligonucleotides. The above formulations are stable in serum and can exhibit minimal leakage of oligonucleotide.
  • Example 4 Response of WSU-DLCL2 Tumors to PNT-100
  • Three formulations which met the specifications of at least 2 mg/ml of encapsulated PNT-100 (SEQ ID NO:1251), greater than 40% encapsulation efficiency and less than 200 ηm particle size (formulations B, D, and F, see example 2) were tested in a human lymphoma model. Lymphoma cells (WSU-DLCL2—Wayne State University Diffuse Large Cell Lymphoma) were obtained from Dr. Ramzi Mohammad, Karmanos Cancer Institute, Wayne State University. Xenografts were transplanted subcutaneously into C17/SCID mice. Seven days after transplantation, mice were injected intravenously with 10 mg/kg of the PNT-100 (SEQ ID NO:1251) formulations and 10 mg/kg of PNT-100R (SEQ ID NO:1288) formulations. The injections were performed daily for 8 days in six mice. The size of the tumors were measured up to 30 days after implantation. All animals survived with no gross toxic pathology.
  • Results in FIG. 1 show that PNT-100 slows tumor growth. 340.9 and 340.8 are formulations with PNT-100 and PNT-100R, respectively. Formulation D with PNT-100 slowed tumor growth better and was less toxic than formulations B and F. (Data not shown.)
  • Experiments done with other lots of PNT-100-liposome formulation D gave similar results, as shown in FIG. 2. Mice were administered 10 mg/kg PNT2253 daily for eight days, an i.v. bolus injection and tumor volume response was caliper measured (left panel). Data show 57% tumor growth inhibition at day 28 post xenograft transplantation or 14 days post drug treatment (n=6; p=0.004). Mice were administered 10 mg/kg PNT2253 daily for five days an i.v. bolus injection and tumor response was caliper measured. Data shows 46% tumor growth inhibition at day 26 post xenograft transplantation or 19 days post drug treatment (n=8; p=0.007). Studies were concluded when control animal xenografts reached >2000 mm3.
  • The tumor burden was calculated from the size measurements of the tumors. FIG. 3 shows that the tumor burden in mice treated with PNT2253, which is PNT-100 in formulation D, was dramatically less than the tumor burden in mice treated with PNT2253R (PNT-100R in formulation D) or PBS.
  • A dose response experiment was performed in WSU-DLCL2 xenograft bearing mice with PNT-100 in formulation D, with a PNT-100 concentration of 4 mg/ml (PNT2254) and 2 mg/ml (PNT2253). C.B.-17 ACID mice between 6-8 weeks old were supplied by Taconic (Hudson, N.Y.). When the tumors reached approximately 100 mm3 volume, treatment with PNT2253 or PNT2254 was initiated. The mice received 0, 0.3, 3, 10, or 20 mg/kg of PNT2254 daily for five days, 30 mg/kg of PNT2254 daily for 2 days, 60 mg/kg of PNT2254 once, 0.3, 3, or 10 mg/kg of PNT2253 daily for 5 days, 20 mg/kg of PNT2253 daily for 2 days, or 30 mg/kg of PNT2253 once via an iv bolus injection. (n=7 (PNT2254) or 8 (PNT2255). The animals were checked at least three times weekly for tumor growth by caliper measurements, and the animals were weighed at least three times weekly. Tumor volumes of all treatment groups were analyzed using GraphPad™ statistical software.
  • A maximum tolerated dose of 20 mg/kg/day of PNT2254 and 10 mg/kg/day of PNT2253 was established. (FIGS. 4 and 5.) Toxicity was achieved at 30 mg/kg/day for PNT2254 and at 20 mg/kg/day for PNT2253, and dosing was stopped after two days due to animal efficacy. A steep dose response was seen with strong anti-tumor efficacy for an extended time period after one dosing cycle. The effect of the two formulations at various dosages on body weight of the mice was determined and is shown in FIG. 6. For both formulations, a dose of 10 mg/kg/day was efficacious while causing minimal weight loss.
  • A mathematical measure of each dose was calculated that determined the drug response in delaying tumor growth rate to 750 mg size in PNT2254 and PNT2253 drugged vs. control non-drugged tumors (Tables 3 and 4).
  • TABLE 3
    Antitumor Activity of PNT2254 in WSU-DLCL2-Bearing SCID Mice
    Log10
    No. of T/C kill
    Agent Animals (%) T − C gross
    PBS control daily for 5 days 7 100 0.0 0.0
    0.3 mg/kg PNT2254 daily for 5 days 7 100 0.0 0.0
     3 mg/kg PNT2254 daily for 5 days 7 75 3 0.45
    10 mg/kg PNT2254 daily for 5 days 7 34 10 1.5
    20 mg/kg PNT2254 daily for 5 days 7 32 10 1.5
    30 mg/kg PNT2254 daily for 2 days 5 27 11 1.65
    (5/7 mice
    survived)
  • TABLE 4
    Antitumor Activity of PNT2253 in WSU-DLCL2-Bearing SCID Mice
    Log10
    No. of T/C kill
    Agent Animals (%) T − C gross
    PBS control daily for 5 days 8 100 0.0 0.0
    0.3 mg/kg PNT2253 daily for 5 days 8 92 0.0 0.0
     3 mg/kg PNT2253 daily for 5 days 8 90 2 0.3
    10 mg/kg PNT2253 daily for 5 days 8 38 9 1.4
    20 mg/kg PNT2253 daily for 2 days 6 28 12 1.8
    (6/8 mice
    survived
    30 mg/kg PNT2253 daily for 1 day 8
    (8/8 dead)
  • T and C are the median times in days for the treatment group (T) and the control group (C) tumors to reach a predetermined weight (750 mg). T−C is a measure of tumor growth delay and is the difference in the median days to 750 mg between the treated (T) and the control (C) group. Log10 kill Gross=T−C value in days/3.32×Td. Td is the mean tumor doubling time (days) estimated from a log-linear growth plot of the control tumors growing in exponential phase. The higher the Log10 kill Gross value, the more efficacious the drug, and a value over 2.8 is considered highly efficacious (Corbett, T. H. et al., “Transplantable Syngeneic Rodent Tumors”. Tumor Models in Cancer Research. Ed. Teicher B. A. Totowa, N.J.: Humana Press Inc., 2002. 41-71). Volume and weight were calculated according to the formula described by Cammisuli, S., et al., Int. J. Cancer, 65, 351-9, 1996.
  • PNT2253 treatment resulted in increased toxicity compared to PNT2254. The most efficacious dose was 10 mg/kg/day for both PNT2253 and PNT2254, and the maximum tolerated dose is 20 mg/kg/day for PNT2254 and 10 mg/kg/day of PNT2253.
  • Example 5 Response of PC-3 Tumors to PNT-100
  • The different formulations were tested in a PC-3 human prostate carcinoma model. Xenografts were generated by sub-cutaneous injection of 2×106 PC-3 cells (ATCC CRL 1435) into nude mice. Mice bearing 50-200 mm3 xenografts were injected intravenously with 10 mg/kg of PNT-100 (SEQ ID NO:1251) or PNT-100R (SEQ ID NO:1288) in one of the formulations B, D or F on days 1, 2, and 5 and with 7.5 mg/kg on days 3 and 4. Results show a decrease in tumor growth with PNT-100, but not with PNT-100R (FIGS. 7 and 8). N=5.
  • Example 6 Toxicity in Monkeys
  • Toxicity of PNT-100 in formula D was explored in Cynomolgus monkeys. Two primates were treated via two hour i.v. infusion with PBS control, 5 mg/kg PNT2254, 25 mg/kg PNT2254, and one primate was treated with 67 mg/kg PNT2254. There was a one week “washout” period between each dosing. Liver enzymes toxicology analysis, complement activation, and gross behavior and physiology measurements were collected before and after each treatment. The purpose of the study was to establish a maximum tolerated dose threshold, and to ensure that there was not a CARPA toxic response to the PNT2254 lipids. CARPA is a toxic response that is historically known to result from a non-classical complement pathway activation toxic response that can cause extreme hypertension and death. The primates tolerated and survived all doses and only a classical complement activation and not non-classical (innate) complement activation was detected. The liver enzyme toxicology analysis demonstrated modest increases in liver enzyme response to PNT2254.
  • Other Embodiments
  • It is to be understood that while the invention has been described in conjunction with the detailed description thereof, the foregoing description is intended to illustrate and not limit the scope of the invention, which is defined by the scope of the appended claims. Other aspects, advantages and modifications are within the scope of the following claims.
  • All references cited herein are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.

Claims (90)

What is claimed is:
1. A mixture comprising an amphoteric liposome and a DNAi oligonucleotide.
2. The mixture of claim 1, wherein the amphoteric liposome has an isoelectric point between 4 and 8.
3. The mixture of claim 1 or 2, wherein the amphoteric liposome has a net negative charge or are neutral at pH 7.4 and have a net positive charge at pH 4.
4. The mixture of claim 1, 2 or 3, wherein the amphoteric liposome a is formed from a lipid phase comprising an amphoteric lipid.
5. The mixture of claim 4, wherein the lipid phase comprises 5 to 30 mol. % of the amphoteric lipid.
6. The mixture of claim 4 or 5, wherein the amphoteric lipid is selected from the group consisting of HistChol, HistDG, isoHistSuccDG, Acylcarnosine and HCChol.
7. The mixture of claim 1, 2 or 3, wherein the amphoteric liposome is formed from a lipid phase comprising a mixture of lipid components with amphoteric properties.
8. The mixture of claim 7, wherein the mixture of lipid components comprises anionic or cationic components, wherein at least one such component is pH responsive.
9. The mixture of claim 8, wherein the mixture of lipid components are selected from the group consisting of (i) a stable cationic lipid and a chargeable anionic lipid, (ii) a chargeable cationic lipid and chargeable anionic lipid and (iii) a stable anionic lipid and a chargeable cationic lipid.
10. The mixture of claim 9, wherein the lipid components comprise one or more anionic lipids selected from the group consisting of DOGSucc, POGSucc, DMGSucc, DPGSucc, DGSucc, DMPS, DPPS, DOPS, POPS, DMPG, DPPG, DOPG, POPG, DMPA, DPPA, DOPA, POPA, CHEMS and Cet-P.
11. The mixture of claim 9 or claim 10, wherein the lipid components comprise one or more anionic lipids selected from the group consisting of DMGSucc, DOPA, CHEMS and Cet-P.
12. The mixture of any of claims 8 to 11, wherein the lipid components comprise one or more cationic lipids selected from the group consisting of DMTAP, DPTAP, DOTAP, DC-Chol, MoChol, HisChol, DPIM, CHIM, DORIE, DDAB, DAC-Chol, TC-Chol, DOTMA, DOGS, (C18)2Gly+N,N-dioctadecylamido-glycine, CTAP, CPyC, DODAP and DOEPC.
13. The mixture of any of claims 8 to 11, wherein the lipid components comprise one or more cationic lipids selected from the group consisting of DOTAP, DC-Chol, MoChol and HisChol.
14. The mixture of claim 7 wherein the anionic lipid is CHEMS and the cationic lipid is MoChol.
15. The mixture of claim 7 wherein the anionic lipid is CHEMS and the cationic lipid is DOTAP.
16. The mixture of claim 7 wherein the anionic lipid is Cet-P and the cationic lipid is MoChol.
17. The mixture of claim 7 wherein the anionic lipid is DMGSucc and the cationic lipid is MoChol.
18. The mixture of any of claims 4 to 17, wherein the lipid phase further comprises neutral lipids.
19. The mixture of claim 18 wherein the neutral lipids comprise sterols and derivatives thereof.
20. The mixture of claim 18 wherein the neutral lipids comprise neutral phospholipids.
21. The mixture of claim 20 wherein the neutral phospholipids comprise phosphatidylcholines.
22. The mixture of claim 21 wherein the phosphatidylcholines are selected from the group consisting of POPC, OPPC, natural or hydrogenated soy bean PC, natural or hydrogenated egg PC, DMPC, DPPC or DOPC and derivatives thereof.
23. The mixture of claim 22 wherein the phosphatidylcholine is POPC.
24. The mixture of claim 20 wherein the neutral phospholipids comprise mixtures of phosphatidylcholines and phosphoethanolamines.
25. The mixture of claim 24 wherein the phosphatidylcholines are selected from the group consisting of POPC, OPPC, natural or hydrogenated soy bean PC, natural or hydrogenated egg PC, DMPC, DPPC or DOPC and derivatives thereof and the phosphatidylethanolamines are selected from the group consisting of DOPE, DMPE, DPPE and derivatives thereof.
26. The mixture of claim 25 wherein the phosphatidylcholine is POPC and the phosphatidylethanolamine is DOPE.
27. The mixture of claim 18 wherein the neutral lipids are POPC and cholesterol.
28. The mixture of claim 24 wherein the amphoteric liposomes comprise DOPE, POPC, CHEMS and MoChol.
29. The mixture of claim 24 wherein the amphoteric liposome comprises POPC, DOPE, MoChol and DMGSucc.
30. The mixture of claim 27 wherein the amphoteric liposome comprises POPC, Chol, CHEMS and DOTAP.
31. The mixture of claim 27 wherein the amphoteric liposome comprises POPC, Chol, CetP and MoChol.
32. A mixture comprising
an amphoteric liposome comprising
PNT-100 (SEQ ID NO:1251);
a mixture of lipid components with amphoteric properties wherein the mixture of lipid components comprises anionic and cationic components, wherein at least one such component is pH responsive and
neutral lipids,
wherein the neutral lipids comprise phosphatidylcholines, phosphatidylethanolamines or sterols and the mixture contains 30 to 70 mole % amphoteric lipids and 30 to 60 mole % neutral lipids.
33. The mixture of claim 32, wherein the cationic lipids are selected from the group consisting of DMTAP, DPTAP, DPTAP, DOTAP, DC-Chol, TC-Chol, MoChol, HisChol, DPIM, CHIM, DORIE, DDAB, DAC-Chol, TC-Chol, DOTMA, DOGS, (C18)2Gly+N,N-dioctadecylamido-glycine, CTAB, CPyC, DODAP, DOEPC and derivatives thereof, and the anionic lipids are selected from the group consisting of DOGSucc, POGSucc, DMGSucc, DPGSucc, DGSucc, DMPS, DPPS, DOPS, POPS, DMPG, DPPG, DOPG, POPG, DMPA, DPPA, DOPA, POPA, CHEMS, Cet-P and derivatives thereof, and wherein the phosphatidylcholines are selected from the group consisting of POPC, OPPC, natural or hydrogenated soy bean PC, natural or hydrogenated egg PC, DMPC, DPPC or DOPC and derivatives thereof, the phosphatidylethanolamines are selected from the group consisting of DOPE, DMPE, DPPE and derivatives thereof, and the sterol is cholesterol or a derivative thereof.
34. The mixture of claim 32, wherein the cationic lipids are selected from the group consisting of DOTAP, DC-Chol, MoChol and HisChol, and the anionic lipids are selected from the group consisting of DMGSucc, DOPA, CHEMS and Cet-P.
35. The mixture of claim 32, wherein the cationic lipid is MoChol and the anionic lipid is CHEMS.
36. The mixture of claim 35, wherein the mixture comprises 10 to 60 mole % of MoChol and 10 to 30 mole % of CHEMS.
37. The mixture of claim 32, wherein the cationic lipid is DOTAP and the anionic lipid is CHEMS.
38. The mixture of claim 37, wherein the mixture comprises 10 to 30 mole % of CHEMS and 5 to 40 mole % of DOTAP.
39. The mixture of claim 32, wherein the cationic lipid is MoChol and the anionic lipid is Cet-P.
40. The mixture of claim 39, wherein the mixture comprises 10 to 60 mole % of MoChol and 5 to 30 mole % of Cet-P.
41. The mixture of claim 32, wherein the cationic lipid is MoChol and the anionic lipid is DMGSucc.
42. The mixture of claim 41, wherein the mixture comprises 20 to 60 mole % of MoChol and 20 to 60 mole % of DMGSucc.
43. The mixture of claim 32, wherein the neutral lipids comprise POPC and DOPE.
44. The mixture of claim 44, wherein the mixture comprises 5 to 40 mole % of POPC and 20 to 50 mole % of DOPE.
45. The mixture of claim 32, wherein the neutral lipids comprise POPC and Chol.
46. The mixture of claim 45, wherein the mixture comprises 10 to 50 mole % of POPC and 30 to 50 mole % of Chol.
47. The mixture of claim 32, wherein the amphoteric liposome comprises POPC, DOPE, MoChol and CHEMS.
48. The mixture of claim 47, wherein the mixture comprises 3 to 20 mole % of POPC, 10 to 60 mole % of DOPE, 10 to 60 mole % of MoChol and 10 to 60 mole % of CHEMS.
49. The mixture of claim 47, wherein the molar ratio of POPC/DOPE/MoChol/CHEMS is about 6/24/47/23.
50. The mixture of claim 47, wherein the molar ratio of POPC/DOPE/MoChol/CHEMS is 15/45/20/20.
51. The mixture of claim 32, wherein the amphoteric liposome comprises POPC, DOPE, DMGSucc and MoChol.
52. The mixture of claim 51, wherein the mixture comprises 3 to 20 mole % of POPC, 10 to 40 mole % of DOPE, 15 to 60 mole % of DMGSucc and 15 to 60 mole % of MoChol.
53. The mixture of claim 52, wherein the molar ratio of POPC/DOPE/DMGSucc/MoChol is about 6/24/23/47.
54. The mixture of claim 52, wherein the molar ratio of POPC/DOPE/DMGSucc/MoChol is about 6/24/47/23.
55. The mixture of claim 32, wherein the amphoteric liposome comprises POPC, Chol, CHEMS and DOTAP.
56. The mixture of claim 55, wherein the mixture comprises 10 to 50 mole % of POPC, 20 to 60 mole % of Chol, 10 to 40 mole % of CHEMS and 5 to 20 mole % of DOTAP.
57. The mixture of claim 56, wherein the molar ratio of POPC/Chol/CHEMS/DOTAP is about 30/40/20/10.
58. The mixture of claim 32, wherein the amphoteric liposome comprises POPC, Chol, Cet-P and MoChol.
59. The mixture of claim 58, wherein the mixture comprises 10 to 40 mole % of POPC, 20 to 50 mole % of Chol, 5 to 30 mole % of Cet-P and 10 to 40 mole % of MoChol.
60. The mixture of claim 59, wherein the molar ratio of POPC/Chol/Cet-P/MoChol is about 35/35/10/20.
61. The mixture of any one of the preceding claims wherein the amphoteric liposomes comprise a size between 50 and 500 ηm.
62. The mixture of any of claims 1-61 wherein the amphoteric liposome comprises a size between 80 and 300 ηm.
63. The mixture of any of claims 1-61 wherein the amphoteric liposome comprises a size between 90 and 200 ηm.
64. The mixture of any of claims 1-63 wherein the amphoteric liposome has a DNAi oligonucleotide concentration of at least 2 mg/ml at a lipid concentration of about 10 to 100 mM or less.
65. The mixture of any of claims 1-64 wherein the DNAi oligonucleotide comprises a DNAi oligomer that hybridizes under physiological conditions to nucleotides 500-2026 of SEQ ID NO:1249 or the complement thereof.
66. The mixture of any of claims 1-64 wherein the DNAi oligonucleotide comprises a DNAi oligomer that hybridizes under physiological conditions to nucleotides 500-1525 of SEQ ID NO:1249 or the complement thereof.
67. The mixture of any of claims 1-64 wherein the DNAi oligonucleotide comprises a DNAi oligomer that hybridizes under physiological conditions to nucleotides 800-1225 of SEQ ID NO:1249 or the complement thereof.
68. The mixture of any of claims 1-64 wherein the DNAi oligonucleotide comprises a DNAi oligomer that hybridizes under physiological conditions to nucleotides 900-1125 of SEQ ID NO:1249 or the complement thereof.
69. The mixture of any of claims 1-64 wherein the DNAi oligonucleotide comprises a DNAi oligomer that hybridizes under physiological conditions to nucleotides 950-1075 of SEQ ID NO:1249 or the complement thereof.
70. The mixture of any of claims 1-64 wherein the DNAi oligonucleotide comprises a DNAi oligomer that hybridizes under physiological conditions to nucleotides 970-1045 of SEQ ID NO:1249 or the complement thereof.
71. The mixture of any of claims 1-64 wherein the DNAi oligonucleotide comprises a DNAi oligomer selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NOs:1250, 1251, 1252, 1253, 1267-1447 and the complements thereof.
72. The mixture of any of claims 1-64 wherein the DNAi oligonucleotide comprises a DNAi oligomer selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NOs 1250, 1251, 1267, 1268, 1276, 1277, 1285, 1286 and the complements thereof.
73. The mixture of any of claims 1-64 wherein the DNAi oligonucleotide comprises a DNAi oligomer selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NOs 1250, 1251, 1289-1358 and the complements thereof.
74. The mixture of any of claims 1-64, wherein the DNAi oligonucleotide comprises SEQ ID NO:1250 or 1251.
75. A method comprising
(a) providing the mixture of any of claims 1-64 and a cell or animal capable of expressing the bcl-2 gene, and
(b) introducing the mixture into the cell or animal.
76. The method of claim 75, wherein introducing the composition results in a reduction of proliferation of the cell, or induces cell death.
77. The method of claim 75, wherein the cell is a cancer cell.
78. The method of claim 75, wherein the animal is a non-human animal.
79. The method of claim 75, wherein the animal is a human.
80. The method of claim 78, wherein the mixture is introduced to the animal at a dosage of between 0.01 mg to 100 mg per kg of body weight.
81. The method of claim 78, wherein the mixture is introduced to the animal one or more times per day.
82. The method of claim 78, wherein the mixture is introduced to the animal continuously.
83. The method of claim 78, wherein the mixture is introduced to the animal by one or more routes of administration selected from the group consisting of topical, pulmonary, intraocular, intranasal, parenteral, and a medical device.
84. The method of claim 74, wherein the cell is in cell culture.
85. The method of claim 74, further comprising the step of introducing a test compound to the cell or animal.
86. The method of claim 85, wherein the test compound is a chemotherapy agent.
87. The method of claim 86, wherein animal has cancer which is selected from the group consisting of pancreatic cancer, colon cancer, breast cancer, bladder cancer, lung cancer, leukemia, prostate cancer, lymphoma, ovarian cancer and melanoma.
88. A pharmaceutical composition comprising the mixture of any of claims 1 to 74.
89. A mixture comprising an amphoteric liposome and a DNAi oligonucleotide comprising SEQ ID NO:1251 or 1250 wherein the liposome comprises POPC, DOPE, MoChol and CHEMS in the molar ratio of POPC/DOPE/MoChol/CHEMS of 15/45/20/20.
90. A mixture comprising amphoteric liposome and a DNAi oligonucleotide comprising SEQ ID NO:1251 or 1250 wherein the liposome comprises POPC, DOPE, MoChol and CHEMS in the molar ratio of POPC/DOPE/MoChol/CHEMS of 6/24/47/23.
US14/568,736 2005-12-01 2014-12-12 Amphoteric Liposome Formulation Abandoned US20150118291A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US14/568,736 US20150118291A1 (en) 2005-12-01 2014-12-12 Amphoteric Liposome Formulation

Applications Claiming Priority (6)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US74119205P 2005-12-01 2005-12-01
US77847306P 2006-03-02 2006-03-02
PCT/US2006/045955 WO2007064857A2 (en) 2005-12-01 2006-12-01 Amphoteric liposome formulation
US8589309A 2009-03-19 2009-03-19
US13/751,536 US20130323298A1 (en) 2005-12-01 2013-01-28 Amphoteric Liposome Formulation
US14/568,736 US20150118291A1 (en) 2005-12-01 2014-12-12 Amphoteric Liposome Formulation

Related Parent Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US13/751,536 Continuation US20130323298A1 (en) 2005-12-01 2013-01-28 Amphoteric Liposome Formulation

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20150118291A1 true US20150118291A1 (en) 2015-04-30

Family

ID=37983382

Family Applications (3)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US12/085,893 Active 2028-07-25 US8367628B2 (en) 2005-12-01 2006-12-01 Amphoteric liposome formulation
US13/751,536 Abandoned US20130323298A1 (en) 2005-12-01 2013-01-28 Amphoteric Liposome Formulation
US14/568,736 Abandoned US20150118291A1 (en) 2005-12-01 2014-12-12 Amphoteric Liposome Formulation

Family Applications Before (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US12/085,893 Active 2028-07-25 US8367628B2 (en) 2005-12-01 2006-12-01 Amphoteric liposome formulation
US13/751,536 Abandoned US20130323298A1 (en) 2005-12-01 2013-01-28 Amphoteric Liposome Formulation

Country Status (7)

Country Link
US (3) US8367628B2 (en)
EP (1) EP1957044B1 (en)
JP (1) JP5122474B2 (en)
CA (1) CA2631677C (en)
ES (1) ES2419106T3 (en)
PL (1) PL1957044T3 (en)
WO (1) WO2007064857A2 (en)

Families Citing this family (51)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8815599B2 (en) 2004-06-01 2014-08-26 Pronai Therapeutics, Inc. Methods and compositions for the inhibition of gene expression
WO2007064857A2 (en) * 2005-12-01 2007-06-07 Pronai Therapeutics, Inc. Amphoteric liposome formulation
ES2548240T3 (en) * 2005-12-01 2015-10-15 Pronai Therapeutics, Inc. Therapies for cancer and pharmaceutical compositions used therein
US8067237B2 (en) 2005-12-13 2011-11-29 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Scaffolds for cell transplantation
EP2004141A2 (en) * 2006-03-17 2008-12-24 Novosom AG An efficient method for loading amphoteric liposomes with nucleic acid active substances
US20140178462A1 (en) * 2006-10-13 2014-06-26 Marina Biotech, Inc. Amphoteric liposomes comprising neutral lipids
CA2665783C (en) 2006-10-13 2015-12-15 Novosom Ag Improvements in or relating to amphoteric liposomes, a method of formulating an amphoteric liposome and a method of loading an amphoteric liposome
US8193246B2 (en) * 2006-12-19 2012-06-05 Marina Biotech, Inc. Lipids and lipid assemblies comprising transfection enhancer elements
DE102007029471A1 (en) * 2007-06-20 2008-12-24 Novosom Ag New optional cationic sterols
WO2009028220A1 (en) * 2007-08-28 2009-03-05 Unitika Ltd. Collagen production promoter
CA2702103A1 (en) * 2007-10-12 2009-04-16 Novosom Ag Improvements in or relating to amphotaric liposomes comprising neutral lipids
WO2009051712A1 (en) * 2007-10-15 2009-04-23 Pronai Therapeutics, Inc. Dnai amphoteric liposome formulation
US9445975B2 (en) 2008-10-03 2016-09-20 Access Business Group International, Llc Composition and method for preparing stable unilamellar liposomal suspension
SG10201901089TA (en) 2008-11-10 2019-03-28 Arbutus Biopharma Corp Novel lipids and compositions for the delivery of therapeutics
JP5588619B2 (en) * 2009-03-11 2014-09-10 一丸ファルコス株式会社 pH-responsive liposome
WO2010147387A2 (en) 2009-06-18 2010-12-23 Industry Academic Cooperation Foundation, Hallym University Immunostimulatory compositions comprising liposome-encapsulated oligonucleotides as active ingredients
ES2386855T3 (en) * 2009-07-09 2012-09-03 Marina Biotech, Inc. Emulation of lipoprotein structures
EP2823810B9 (en) * 2009-07-09 2019-10-30 Novosom Verwaltungs GmbH Amphoteric liposomes comprising imino lipids
WO2011088309A1 (en) 2010-01-14 2011-07-21 Regulus Therapeutics Inc. Microrna compositions and methods
AU2011311904B2 (en) 2010-10-06 2016-02-25 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Injectable, pore-forming hydrogels for materials-based cell therapies
WO2012109495A1 (en) 2011-02-09 2012-08-16 Metabolic Solutions Development Company, Llc Cellular targets of thiazolidinediones
TWI532501B (en) 2011-03-31 2016-05-11 Kao Corp Cell composition
DK2838515T3 (en) 2012-04-16 2020-02-24 Harvard College MESOPOROUS SILICON Dioxide COMPOSITIONS FOR MODULATING IMMUNE RESPONSES
GR1008018B (en) 2012-09-06 2013-10-29 Ιδρυμα Ιατροβιολογικων Ερευνων Ακαδημιας Αθηνων, Lipid assemblies comprising anionic lysolipids and use thereof
CN104884637A (en) * 2012-11-05 2015-09-02 普隆奈治疗公司 Methods of using biomarkers for the treatment of cancer by modulation of BCL2 expression
US9603799B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2017-03-28 Htd Biosystems Inc. Liposomal vaccine adjuvants and methods of making and using same
US20140271815A1 (en) * 2013-03-15 2014-09-18 Aryo Sorayya Heat-and freeze-stable vaccines and methods of making and using same
CA2932122C (en) 2013-12-03 2022-04-19 Northwestern University Liposomal particles, methods of making same and uses thereof
US10682400B2 (en) 2014-04-30 2020-06-16 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Combination vaccine devices and methods of killing cancer cells
CA2953216C (en) 2014-06-04 2020-12-22 Exicure, Inc. Multivalent delivery of immune modulators by liposomal spherical nucleic acids for prophylactic or therapeutic applications
WO2016048242A1 (en) * 2014-09-24 2016-03-31 Nanyang Technological University Sustained timolol maleate delivery from liposomes for glaucoma therapy and ocular hypertension
AU2015349680A1 (en) 2014-11-21 2017-06-08 Northwestern University The sequence-specific cellular uptake of spherical nucleic acid nanoparticle conjugates
US11045488B2 (en) 2014-12-26 2021-06-29 Nitto Denko Corporation RNA interference agents for GST-π gene modulation
US20180002702A1 (en) 2014-12-26 2018-01-04 Nitto Denko Corporation Methods and compositions for treating malignant tumors associated with kras mutation
US10264976B2 (en) 2014-12-26 2019-04-23 The University Of Akron Biocompatible flavonoid compounds for organelle and cell imaging
US10792299B2 (en) 2014-12-26 2020-10-06 Nitto Denko Corporation Methods and compositions for treating malignant tumors associated with kras mutation
AU2016209295B2 (en) 2015-01-21 2021-08-12 Genevant Sciences Gmbh Methods, compositions, and systems for delivering therapeutic and diagnostic agents into cells
EP3250250A4 (en) 2015-01-30 2019-05-22 President and Fellows of Harvard College Peritumoral and intratumoral materials for cancer therapy
US10722599B2 (en) 2015-02-04 2020-07-28 Yissum Research Development Company Of The Hebrew University Of Jerusalem Ltd. Lipid assemblies and uses thereof and some pH and electrostatic modulating lipids to be used in said assemblies
JP7094533B2 (en) 2015-04-10 2022-07-04 プレジデント アンド フェローズ オブ ハーバード カレッジ Immune cell capture device and its manufacture and use
KR20180086260A (en) 2015-12-13 2018-07-30 닛토덴코 가부시키가이샤 SIRNA structure for high active and reduced off-target
CN115531609A (en) 2016-02-06 2022-12-30 哈佛学院校长同事会 Remodeling hematopoietic niches to reconstitute immunity
KR102617833B1 (en) 2016-05-06 2023-12-27 엑시큐어 오퍼레이팅 컴퍼니 Liposomal spherical nucleic acid (SNA) construct presenting antisense oligonucleotides (ASO) for specific knockdown of interleukin 17 receptor mRNA
EP3484448A4 (en) 2016-07-13 2020-04-01 President and Fellows of Harvard College Antigen-presenting cell-mimetic scaffolds and methods for making and using the same
US11364304B2 (en) 2016-08-25 2022-06-21 Northwestern University Crosslinked micellar spherical nucleic acids
US11696954B2 (en) 2017-04-28 2023-07-11 Exicure Operating Company Synthesis of spherical nucleic acids using lipophilic moieties
US11433131B2 (en) 2017-05-11 2022-09-06 Northwestern University Adoptive cell therapy using spherical nucleic acids (SNAs)
KR20200028997A (en) 2017-07-13 2020-03-17 노오쓰웨스턴 유니버시티 General and direct method of preparing oligonucleotide-functionalized metal-organic framework nanoparticles
KR102289921B1 (en) * 2018-03-20 2021-08-17 (주)바이오인프라생명과학 Method for preparing liposome synthesis containing ultrasound responsive microbubble for drug delivery and liposome using the same
IL312302A (en) 2021-10-28 2024-06-01 Lyell Immunopharma Inc Methods of generating cells
WO2024077174A1 (en) 2022-10-05 2024-04-11 Lyell Immunopharma, Inc. Methods for culturing nr4a-deficient cells

Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8367628B2 (en) * 2005-12-01 2013-02-05 Pronai Therapeutics, Inc. Amphoteric liposome formulation

Family Cites Families (72)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US574039A (en) * 1896-12-29 Conveying apparatus
US5264423A (en) 1987-03-25 1993-11-23 The United States Of America As Represented By The Department Of Health And Human Services Inhibitors for replication of retroviruses and for the expression of oncogene products
US5276019A (en) 1987-03-25 1994-01-04 The United States Of America As Represented By The Department Of Health And Human Services Inhibitors for replication of retroviruses and for the expression of oncogene products
US5831066A (en) 1988-12-22 1998-11-03 The Trustees Of The University Of Pennsylvania Regulation of bcl-2 gene expression
WO1994008003A1 (en) * 1991-06-14 1994-04-14 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. ANTISENSE OLIGONUCLEOTIDE INHIBITION OF THE ras GENE
US5582986A (en) * 1991-06-14 1996-12-10 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Antisense oligonucleotide inhibition of the ras gene
US5474796A (en) * 1991-09-04 1995-12-12 Protogene Laboratories, Inc. Method and apparatus for conducting an array of chemical reactions on a support surface
WO1993009127A1 (en) 1991-11-07 1993-05-13 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Enhanced triple-helix formation directed by oligonucleotides composed of 2'-deoxy-7-deazaxanthosine and 2'-deoxy-7-deazaguanosine and related analogs
WO1993009788A1 (en) 1991-11-13 1993-05-27 Baylor College Of Medicine Triplex forming oligonucleotide reagents targeted to the neu oncogene promoter and method of use
US5792608A (en) * 1991-12-12 1998-08-11 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Nuclease stable and binding competent oligomers and methods for their use
WO1994017086A1 (en) 1993-01-25 1994-08-04 Apollon, Inc. Gene regulation by targeting putative intramolecular triple helix
IL108367A0 (en) * 1993-01-27 1994-04-12 Hektoen Inst For Medical Resea Antisense polynzcleotide inhibition of human growth factor-sensitive cancer cells
DE69424406T2 (en) 1993-02-19 2000-10-26 Nippon Shinyaku Co., Ltd. MEDICINAL COMPOSITION CONTAINING A NUCLEIC ACID COPOLYMER
WO1994029461A1 (en) 1993-06-11 1994-12-22 Commonwealth Scientific And Industrial Research Organisation Method for specific silencing of genes by dna methylation
ATE286125T1 (en) 1993-09-20 2005-01-15 Univ Pennsylvania REGULATION OF BCL-2 GENE EXPRESSION
WO1995017507A1 (en) * 1993-12-23 1995-06-29 Biognostik Gesellschaft für Biomolekulare Diagnostik mbH ANTISENSE NUCLEIC ACIDS FOR THE PREVENTION AND TREATMENT OF DISORDERS IN WHICH EXPRESSION OF c-erbB PLAYS A ROLE
US5599922A (en) 1994-03-18 1997-02-04 Lynx Therapeutics, Inc. Oligonucleotide N3'-P5' phosphoramidates: hybridization and nuclease resistance properties
US5518885A (en) * 1994-04-19 1996-05-21 The United States Of America As Represented By The Department Of Health & Human Services ERBB2 promoter binding protein in neoplastic disease
US5734039A (en) * 1994-09-15 1998-03-31 Thomas Jefferson University Antisense oligonucleotides targeting cooperating oncogenes
US6221959B1 (en) 1994-11-18 2001-04-24 Supratek Pharma, Inc. Polynucleotide compositions
WO1996018732A2 (en) 1994-12-15 1996-06-20 Board Of Trustees Of The University Of Illinois Sequence-specific inhibition of dna synthesis by triplex-forming oligonucleotides
CA2241835A1 (en) 1995-10-19 1997-04-24 Cordis Corporation Conjugation of c-myc antisense oligonucleotides with cholesterol to significantly enhance their inhibitory effect on neointimal hyperplasia
US6977244B2 (en) * 1996-10-04 2005-12-20 Board Of Regents, The University Of Texas Systems Inhibition of Bcl-2 protein expression by liposomal antisense oligodeoxynucleotides
EP1027033B1 (en) 1997-05-14 2009-07-22 The University Of British Columbia High efficiency encapsulation of nucleic acids in lipid vesicles
US5874416A (en) 1997-11-07 1999-02-23 Sheikhnejad; Gholamreza RAS antisense inhibition
US5968748A (en) 1998-03-26 1999-10-19 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Antisense oligonucleotide modulation of human HER-2 expression
TR200003441T2 (en) 1998-05-20 2001-04-20 Expression Genetics, Inc. A polyethylene glyco-attached poly-1-lysine polymeric gene carrier targeting hepatocyte
US6900187B2 (en) 1999-02-26 2005-05-31 The University Of British Columbia TRPM-2 antisense therapy using an oligonucleotide having 2′-O-(2-methoxy)ethyl modifications
US7163801B2 (en) * 1999-09-01 2007-01-16 The Burnham Institute Methods for determining the prognosis for cancer patients using tucan
AU2001250572A1 (en) 2000-04-07 2001-10-23 Epigenomics Ag Detection of single nucleotide polymorphisms (snp's) and cytosine-methylations
US20040006036A1 (en) 2000-04-12 2004-01-08 Gmr, A Delaware Corporation Silencing transcription by methylation
US6838556B2 (en) 2000-06-06 2005-01-04 Genelabs Technologies, Inc. Promoters for regulated gene expression
US7795232B1 (en) * 2000-08-25 2010-09-14 Genta Incorporated Methods of treatment of a bcl-2 disorder using bcl-2 antisense oligomers
US7892730B2 (en) 2000-12-22 2011-02-22 Sagres Discovery, Inc. Compositions and methods for cancer
AU2002241952A1 (en) 2001-01-22 2002-07-30 Genta Incorporated Cell-proliferative disorder treatments using cre decoy oligomers, bcl-2 antisense and hybrid oligomers
DE10109898A1 (en) * 2001-02-21 2002-09-05 Novosom Gmbh Variable charge lipids
DE10109897A1 (en) * 2001-02-21 2002-11-07 Novosom Ag Optional cationic liposomes and their use
NZ530101A (en) 2001-05-17 2007-01-26 Avi Biopharma Inc Methods for treating cancer by administering an oligomer antisense to c-myc together with a cancer chemotherapeutic agent
WO2003070912A2 (en) 2001-06-06 2003-08-28 Sirna Therapeutics, Inc. RNA INTERFERENCE MEDIATED INHIBITION OF EPIDERMAL GROWTH FACTOR RECEPTOR GENE EXPRESSION USING SHORT INTERFERING NUCLEIC ACID (siNA)
US20050176025A1 (en) 2001-05-18 2005-08-11 Sirna Therapeutics, Inc. RNA interference mediated inhibition of B-cell CLL/Lymphoma-2 (BCL-2) gene expression using short interfering nucleic acid (siNA)
EP2325193A3 (en) * 2001-11-02 2012-05-02 Insert Therapeutics, Inc. Methods and compositions for therapeutic use of RNA interference
ITMI20012367A1 (en) 2001-11-09 2003-05-09 Visufarma S R L ANTISENSE OLIGONUCLEOTIDES THAT REGULATE THE EXPRESSION OF THE ANTIAPOPTOTIC GENE BCL-2
DE10207177A1 (en) * 2002-02-19 2003-09-04 Novosom Ag Optionally cationic lipids
US7858117B2 (en) * 2002-02-21 2010-12-28 Novosom Ag Amphoteric liposomes and their use
EP3100719A3 (en) * 2002-05-15 2017-02-22 California Pacific Medical Center Delivery of nucleic acid-like compounds
CA2486967A1 (en) 2002-05-24 2003-12-04 Neopharm, Inc. Cardiolipin compositions their methods of preparation and use
EA200500659A1 (en) 2002-10-16 2005-10-27 Неофарм, Инк. Subsidiaries. The process is to get the cardiolipine or its analogue (options) and the contained liposomes.
US7256284B2 (en) * 2002-11-14 2007-08-14 Genta Incorporated Inhibitory oligonucleotides targeted to Bcl-2
JP2006509010A (en) 2002-12-05 2006-03-16 インペリアル・カレッジ・イノベイションズ・リミテッド Control of apoptosis
AU2003300414A1 (en) 2002-12-19 2004-07-14 Genta Incorporated Methods of treatment of a bcl-2 disorder using bcl-2 antisense oligomers
DE10361917A1 (en) * 2003-12-22 2005-07-21 Novosom Ag In vitro transfection of cells, useful e.g. in animal tests and for human applications, comprises centrifuging the cells with active agents, preferably packaged in liposomes
ATE467679T1 (en) 2003-12-23 2010-05-15 Santaris Pharma As OLIGOMERIC COMPOUNDS FOR MODULATING BCL-2
EP1742661A2 (en) 2004-01-07 2007-01-17 Neopharm, Inc. Lipid compositions and use thereof
DE102004054730A1 (en) * 2004-03-28 2006-05-11 Novosom Ag Serum stable amphoteric liposomes
JP2007222190A (en) * 2004-03-29 2007-09-06 Brother Ind Ltd Printable embroidery machine
US7498315B2 (en) 2004-06-01 2009-03-03 Pronai Therapeutics, Inc. Methods and compositions for the inhibition of gene expression
US8815599B2 (en) * 2004-06-01 2014-08-26 Pronai Therapeutics, Inc. Methods and compositions for the inhibition of gene expression
US7807647B2 (en) * 2004-06-01 2010-10-05 Pronai Therapeutics, Inc. Methods and compositions for cancer therapy
AU2005300638A1 (en) 2004-11-05 2006-05-11 Novosom Ag Improvements in or relating to pharmaceutical compositions comprising an oligonucleotide as an active agent
JP2008520600A (en) * 2004-11-19 2008-06-19 ノヴォソム アクチェンゲゼルシャフト Improvements in or relating to pharmaceutical compositions for topical administration
WO2007014150A2 (en) 2005-07-22 2007-02-01 Neopharm, Inc. Method of administering liposomes containing oligonucleotides
KR20080082956A (en) * 2005-09-15 2008-09-12 노보솜 아게 Improvements in or relating to amphoteric liposomes
US20080088046A1 (en) * 2006-10-13 2008-04-17 Steffen Panzner Amphoteric liposomes, a method of formulating an amphoteric liposome and a method of loading an amphoteric liposome
WO2007064853A2 (en) 2005-12-01 2007-06-07 Pronai Therapeutics, Inc. Locked nucleic acid oligonucleotides
ES2548240T3 (en) 2005-12-01 2015-10-15 Pronai Therapeutics, Inc. Therapies for cancer and pharmaceutical compositions used therein
WO2007065017A2 (en) 2005-12-01 2007-06-07 Pronai Therapeutics, Inc. Oligonucleotide cationic liposomal delivery system
EP1975132A1 (en) * 2005-12-12 2008-10-01 Qinhuangdao Yipeng Special Glass Co., Ltd Antibacterial sol-gel coating solution, method for preparing antibacterial sol-gel coating solution, antibacterial articles, and method and equipments for preparing antibacterial articles
JP2009539404A (en) 2006-06-12 2009-11-19 オンコメチローム サイエンシズ エス.エイ. Methylation markers for early detection and prognosis of colorectal cancer
CA2665783C (en) * 2006-10-13 2015-12-15 Novosom Ag Improvements in or relating to amphoteric liposomes, a method of formulating an amphoteric liposome and a method of loading an amphoteric liposome
US8193246B2 (en) * 2006-12-19 2012-06-05 Marina Biotech, Inc. Lipids and lipid assemblies comprising transfection enhancer elements
WO2008103431A2 (en) 2007-02-23 2008-08-28 Pronai Therapeutics, Inc. Dnai - liposomes
WO2009051712A1 (en) 2007-10-15 2009-04-23 Pronai Therapeutics, Inc. Dnai amphoteric liposome formulation

Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8367628B2 (en) * 2005-12-01 2013-02-05 Pronai Therapeutics, Inc. Amphoteric liposome formulation

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
PL1957044T3 (en) 2013-11-29
US8367628B2 (en) 2013-02-05
WO2007064857A3 (en) 2007-08-30
JP5122474B2 (en) 2013-01-16
EP1957044B1 (en) 2013-03-13
CA2631677A1 (en) 2007-06-07
JP2009518297A (en) 2009-05-07
US20130323298A1 (en) 2013-12-05
ES2419106T3 (en) 2013-08-19
WO2007064857A2 (en) 2007-06-07
EP1957044A2 (en) 2008-08-20
WO2007064857A8 (en) 2008-03-20
US20090220584A1 (en) 2009-09-03
CA2631677C (en) 2014-08-12

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US8367628B2 (en) Amphoteric liposome formulation
US8822646B2 (en) Cancer therapies and pharmaceutical compositions used therein
US20150272980A1 (en) Dosing and Administration of Oligonucleotide Cancer Therapies
DE60030970T2 (en) METHOD AND COMPOSITIONS FOR NONVIRAL GENE THERAPY FOR THE TREATMENT OF HYPERPROLIFERATIVE DISEASES
EP1212085B1 (en) Compositions for stimulating cytokine secretion and inducing an immune response
Nikoofal-Sahlabadi et al. Liposomal CpG-ODN: An in vitro and in vivo study on macrophage subtypes responses, biodistribution and subsequent therapeutic efficacy in mice models of cancers
US20030104044A1 (en) Compositions for stimulating cytokine secretion and inducing an immune response
EP2914742A1 (en) Methods of using biomarkers for the treatment of cancer by modulation of bcl2!expression
WO2009051712A1 (en) Dnai amphoteric liposome formulation
US20050249794A1 (en) Compositions for stimulating cytokine secretion and inducing an immune response
WO2007064853A2 (en) Locked nucleic acid oligonucleotides
WO2007065017A2 (en) Oligonucleotide cationic liposomal delivery system
WO2008103431A2 (en) Dnai - liposomes
WO2023091960A1 (en) Vectors for increasing nprl2 expression in cancer cells and methods of use thereof
AU2013337298A1 (en) Dosing and administration of oligonucleotide cancer therapies
WO2024182585A1 (en) Cancer therapy with tgf-beta-2 and irinotecan agents
CN118164866A (en) Cationic lipid compounds, compositions and uses thereof
AU2013337251A1 (en) Methods of using biomarkers for the treatment of cancer by modulation of BCL2|expression

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AS Assignment

Owner name: NOVOSOM AG, GERMANY

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:ENDERT, GEROLD;HERZOG, NATALIE;KERWITZ, YVONNE;SIGNING DATES FROM 20090112 TO 20090202;REEL/FRAME:035186/0523

Owner name: PRONAI THERAPEUTICS, INC., MICHIGAN

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:GOODWIN, NEAL CLIFFORD;RODRIGUEZA, WENDI;SIGNING DATES FROM 20090113 TO 20090223;REEL/FRAME:035186/0511

AS Assignment

Owner name: NOVOSOM AG, GERMANY

Free format text: CORRECTIVE ASSIGNMENT TO CORRECT ADD 4TH INVENTOR PREVIOUSLY RECORDED AT REEL: 035186 FRAME: 0523. ASSIGNOR(S) HEREBY CONFIRMS THE ASSIGNMENT;ASSIGNORS:ENDERT, GEROLD;HERZOG, NATALIE;KERWITZ, YVONNE;AND OTHERS;SIGNING DATES FROM 20090112 TO 20090202;REEL/FRAME:035507/0082

AS Assignment

Owner name: NOVOSOM VERWALTUNGS GMBH, GERMANY

Free format text: CHANGE OF NAME;ASSIGNOR:NOVOSOM AG;REEL/FRAME:036188/0364

Effective date: 20110325

STCB Information on status: application discontinuation

Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION